Silhouette HF Service PDF

GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 2127416-100
Revision 10
Silhouette HF
Service Manual
Copyright 2000 By General Electric Company
Service Documentation
0120
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS SILHOUETTE HF
Service Manual
REV 1 DIRECTION 2127416-100
IMPORTANT!...X-RAY PROTECTION
X-Ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the
instructions herein contained should be thoroughly read and understood by
everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in
operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to
assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other
than the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection.
Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent
the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained
and fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP
Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of
the International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect
against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company,
Medical Systems Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury
or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or
devices be used.
i
Service Manual
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.
IF A CUSTOMER'S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE

OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER'S
RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS
SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS
UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM
ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N'EST DISPONIBLE QU'EN

AVERTISSEMENT ANGLAIS.
SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS

UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L'ANGLAIS, C'EST AU CLIENT QU'IL
INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE.
NE PAS TENTER D'INTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS
TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N'A PAS T CONSULT ET
COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER
CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L'OPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES
BLESSURES DUES DES DANGERS LECTRIQUES,
MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

WARNUNG ENGLISCHE SPRACHE.
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE

BENTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE
ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.
VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR
DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN
UND VERSTANDEN WURDE.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU
VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES
BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE
SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN
KOMMEN.
Service Manual
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

AVISO
SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA
UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN.
NO SEA DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN
HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE
SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR
A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL
PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSES
ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA

DISPONVEEM INGLS.
SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA,

QUE NO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUALS NOUTRO
IDIOMA, DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS
SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER
CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE
ASSISTNCIA TCNICA.
O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A
SEGURANA DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A
`CHOQUES ELTRICOS, MECNICOS OU OTROS.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBLE

AVVERTENZA SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS

RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE
TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENAIONE DELL'APPARECCHIATURA
SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED
AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO.
NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA
POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO
LESIONI ALL'ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE,
ALL'UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
iii
Service Manual
This product complies with the regulatory requirements of the following:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices when it bears the following
CE marking of conformity.
0120
European registered place of business:

Positronica, S.A.
C/Castrillo, 51
35004 Las Palmas de Gran Canaria
Spain
Medical Device Good Manufacturing Practice Manual issued by the FDA (Food and
Drug Administration, Department of Health,USA).
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), an independent testing laboratory.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
iv
Service Manual
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 1 GENERAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 TABLE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
SECTION 3 GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

3-1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3-2 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
3-3 Tube and Collimator Compatibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
SECTION 4 TUBE STAND SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
SECTION 5 COLLIMATOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

5-1 Automatic Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
5-2 Manual Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
SECTION 6 VERTICAL WALL STAND SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
SECTION 7 X-RAY TUBE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

7-1 BXT 200 X-Ray Tube Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
7-2 BXT 14100 X-Ray Tube Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 1 TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1-1 Table Top Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1-2 Positioning the Table Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1-3 Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
1-4 Alignment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
1-5 Cassette/Grid Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
1-6 Table Top Assembly/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
1-7 Operational Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
1-8 Cover Assembly/Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2 Pre-installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-3 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-4 Powering the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2-5 Calibrating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-6 Verifying Programmed Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-7 Connection to Room Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2-8 PBL/Door Interlock Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2-9 Inspecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
SECTION 3 COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

3-1 D70A (Automatic Collimator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
3-2 D50M (Manual Collimator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
SECTION 4 Vertical Bucky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

4-1 Bucky Structure Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
4-2 Assembling the Bucky Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
4-3 Electrical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
4-4 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
v
Service Manual
SECTION 5 TUBE STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
5-1 Tools, Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
5-2 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
5-3 Room Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
5-4 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
5-5 CDRH Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
5-6 Alignment of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
5-7 Installation Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
5-8 Base Track and Leveling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
5-9 Securing the Base Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
5-10 Base and Tube Stand Column Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
5-11 Removal of Counterweight Locking Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
5-12 Installation of the Tube Stand in the Base Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
5-13 Installation of the Track Stop Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
5-14 Tube Stand Column Vertical Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
5-15 Installing Tube Support Bracket (Mounting Fork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
5-16 Installing Trunnion (BTR-3F) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
5-17 Installing the X-Ray Tube and Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
5-18 Hand Grip Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
5-19 Leveling Collimator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
5-20 Vertical Counterweight Balancing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
5-21 Location of the Locks and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
5-22 Installation of the Vertical and Horizontal SID Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
5-23 Installation of the High-Voltage Cables and the System Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
5-24 Vertical Distance Scales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
5-25 Column Rotation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
5-26 Tube Stand Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
5-27 Collimator Light Field Versus the Actual X-Ray Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
CHAPTER 3 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

SECTION 1 TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2-2 Reference Voltage Calibration P/N 208116 (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2-3 Rotor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2-4 Liquid Crystal Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
2-5 Source Charger Calibration P/N 208088 (A11 and A14) (For SE Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
2-6 Line Voltage Monitor Calibration P/N 208099 (A11) (Not Applicable For SE Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6a
2-7 Regulated Power Supply Calibration P/N 208084 (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6a
2-8 KVP Control Board P/N 208089 (A4 and A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6a
2-9 Filament Control Regulator Board P/N 208163 (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2-10 System Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2-11 System Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

SECTION 4 VERTICAL BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
vi
Service Manual
CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

SECTION 1 TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1-1 Operational Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

2-1 Visual Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
2-2 Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3


SECTION 5 TUBE STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

CHAPTER 5 SERVICE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

SECTION 1 TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1-1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1-2 Vertical Travel (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1-3 Up-Down Motion Limitation (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1-4 Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1-5 Four-Way Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
1-6 Six-way (Hi-Lo Elevating) Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
2-2 Error Messages And Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
2-3 Possible Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
2-4 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
2-5 Diagnostic Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
2-6 IC Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12E
2-7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12G
2-8 High Speed Starter Control Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12I
2-9 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13


4-1 Assembly and Disassembly of the Bucky Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
4-2 Assembly and Disassembly of the Flat Base Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
4-3 Assembly and Disassembly of Collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

5-1 Transverse Carriage Assembly Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5-2 Transverse Carriage Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
vii
Service Manual
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

SECTION 1 TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1-2 User Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1-3 Service Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7


4-1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
CHAPTER 7 RENEWAL PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SECTION 1 TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

4-1 D70A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
4-2 D50M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
CHAPTER 8 SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-0
viii
Service Manual
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE TYPE OF MODIFICATION
0 March 17, 1995 Initial Release.

1 April 14, 1995 General updates from reviews. Chapter 1 updated with new safety
information. Chapters 2, 3, and 4 added minor corrections.
2 October 17, 1995 General updates (ECNs, field feedback, etc.).
3 January 1, 1996 CE mark, IGBT driver modification, ESD caution, language EPROM.
4 June 18, 1996 Added Tomography, 50 kW generator, and Two Tube Switch options;
CE/UL mark. Incorporated ECNs 2098, 2107, 2123, 2210, 2267, 2285,
2306, 2330, 2350, 2366, 2383, 2388, 2391, 2392.
5 August 21, 1997 Incorporated ECN 2396 (TB1 on A12), ECN 2494 (208113 bd.), ECN
2505 (208099 bd.), ECN 2515 (F7 change), ECN 2602 (208133 bd.),
ECN 2614 (exp. counter, auto shut-off override), ECN 2630 (HSS
fuse)
6 May 13, 1998 Incorporated ECN 2644 (F21 on HSS), 2652 (208134 p/n), 2660
(208084), 2673 (208134), 2711 (208113), 2712 (208133), 2754
(208133), 2759 (HSS interconn.), 2828 (stud brkt), 2836 (208089),
2841 (HSS harness), general updates
7 August 10, 1998 Incorporated ECN 2913 (documentation updates from GE review),
ECN 2915 (HFQ-IHSS documentation) ECN 2870 (electric handle
assy.), ECN 2937 (AID ion chamber).
8 January 30, 1999 Incorporated ECN 2883 (emergency switch), misc. changes
9 March 3, 2000 Incorporated ECN 3117 (208090 and 208163 schematics), ECN 3125
(102601-1,-2 and 102602-1,-2), ECN 3199 (2247174). Additional
updates to replacement parts lists, Chapter 7.
10 September 11, 2000 Replaced deleted steps of procedure for Replacing the Drive Actuator:
Hi-Lo Elevating Tables. Incorporated ECN 1235 (208094 schematic).
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
I-iii 1 1-5 thru 1-8 4 2-11 thru 2-12 8

iv 4 1-9 7 2-13 1
v 6 1-10 thru 1-13 4 2-14 thru 2-17 8
vi 8 1-14 5 2-18 9
vii 7 2-1 thru 2-2 1 2-6 thru 2-7 1
viii thru x 10 2-3 7 2-8 9
1-1 4 2-4 4 2-9 1
1-2 thru 1-4 1 2-5 7 2-10 2
ix
Service Manual
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Contd)
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
2-19 1 5-1 thru 5-3 4 7-16 thru 7-17 1

2-20 2 5-4 7 7-18 thru 7-19 6
2-21 thru 2-23 1 5-5 1 7-20 1
2-24 2 5-6 7 7-21 6
2-25 thru 2-26 4 5-7 thru 5-11 1 7-22 thru 7-23 1
2-27 1 5-12 thru 5-12a 7 7-24 9
2-28 3 5-12b thru 5-12d 2 7-25 thru 7-26 1
2-28a 4 5-12e thru 5-12f 8 7-27 5
2-28b thru 2-28c 5 5-12g thru 5-12h 7 7-28 1
2-28d thru 2-29 6 5-12i thru 5-17 7 8-0 7
2-30 Blank 5-18 5 8-0a 10
2-31 1 5-19 thru 5-20 7 8-1 thru 8-2 4
2-32 6 5-21 5 8-3 thru 8-6 6
2-33 thru 2-37 1 5-22 7 8-7 thru 8-8 1
2-38 4 5-23 5 8-9 9
2-39 thru 2-44 1 5-24 thru 5-27b 7 8-10 9
2-45 6 5-27c 6 8-11 9
2-46 thru 2-48 1 5-27d Blank 8-12 9
2-49 7 5-28 thru 5-45 1 8-13 thru 8-26 7
2-50 thru 2-55 1 5-46 thru 5-47 4 8-27 thru 8-28 9
2-56 Blank 5-48 Blank 8-28a thru 8-28b 7
2-57 thru 2-59 1 6-1 thru 6-3 1 8-29 thru 8-30 1
2-60 4 6-4 2 8-31 thru 8-32 3
2-61 1 6-5 thru 6-6 10 8-32a thru 8-32b 7
2-62 thru 2-77 4 6-7 thru 6-15 1 8-33 thru 8-34 3
2-78 Blank 6-16 thru 6-21 7 8-34a thru 8-36f 5
3-1 5 6-22 Blank 8-37 thru 8-40 1
3-2 1 7-1 thru 7-1a 8 8-41 thru 8-62 7
3-3 thru 3-4b 3 7-1b 4 8-63 thru 8-64 9
3-5 thru 3-6 4 7-2 thru 7-3 1 8-65 thru 8-66 7
3-6a 6 7-4 5 8-67 thru 8-68 9
3-7 thru 3-8 7 7-5 8 8-69 thru 8-86 7
3-9 8 7-6 1 8-86a thru 8-86d 10
3-10 thru 3-13 7 7-7 10 8-87 thru 8-102 7
3-14 1 7-8 thru 7-10 6 8-103 thru 8-110 1
3-15 thru 3-20 7 7-11 9 8-110a thru 8-110d 6
3-21 thru 3-35 1 7-12 6 8-110e thru 8-110f 7
3-36 thru 3-46 8 7-13 9 8-110g thru 8-110ab 6
4-1 1 7-14 1 8-111 thru 8-124 1
4-2 thru 4-7 5 7-15 9 8-125 thru 8-126 5
4-8 Blank
x
Service Manual
CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 1
GENERAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
See Illustration 1-1.

ILLUSTRATION 1-1
GENERAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
180 cm SID
(72 in. SID)
100 cm SID
(40 in. SID)
1829mm
(72 in.) 145 +145 1813mm
MIN (71.38 in.)
3 MIN
2273mm
(89.5 in.) 6
MIN 2089mm
100cm SID (82.25 in.)
(40 in. SID)
438mm 426mm
(16.75 in.) 362mm
(17.25 in.)
(14.25 in.)
MIN. 1711mm
4 5 (67.4 in.)
800mm MAX
(31.5 in.)
MAX
508mm
(20 in.)
MIN
1 Longitudinal Focal Spot Travel

2 Floor Track Mounting Holes to Table Base centerline
3 Maximum Vertical Focal Spot (Beam Vertical)
4 Minimum Vertical Focal Spot (Beam Vertical)
5 Maximum Vertical Focal Spot (Beam Horizontal)
6 Minimum Vertical Focal Spot (Beam Horizontal)
7 Floor Track Mounting Holes to Wall
1-1
Service Manual
SECTION 2
TABLE SPECIFICATIONS
See Table 1-1 for Table Specifications.

See Table 1-2 for Table Bucky Specifications.
See Table 1-3 for Table Stationary Grid Cabinet Specifications.
TABLE 1-1
TABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Parameter
Four-Way Tables Elevating Tables
Length 2032 mm (80 in.) 2032 mm (80 in.)

Width 864 mm (34 in.) 864 mm (34 in.)
Height 800 mm (31-1/2 in.) 800 mm (31-1/2 in.)
Height in Lowered Position N/A 508 mm (20 in.)
Radiographic Area 617 mm x 1641 mm (24-3/8 in. x 617 mm x 1641 mm (24-3/8 in. x
64-3/5 in.) 64-3/5 in.)
Longitudinal Travel 724 mm (28-1/2 in.) 724 mm (28-1/2 in.)
Transverse Travel 218 mm (8-3/5 in.) 218 mm (8-3/5 in.)
Travel Time N/A 11 sec.
Table Rating 136 kg (300 lbs.) 136 kg (300 lbs.)
Table Weight 163 kg (360 lbs.) 206 kg (454 lbs.)
Table Top Filtration Less than 1.0 mm Aluminum Less than 1.0 mm Aluminum
equivalency at 100 kVp equivalency at 100 kVp
1-2
Service Manual
TABLE 1-2
TABLE BUCKY SPECIFICATIONS
Parameter Specification
Longitudinal Travel in Table 438 mm (17-1/4 in.)
Grid 40 line/cm; 12:1 ratio; 100 cm focus
Cassette Tray (non size sensing) Midwest standard duty
Cassette Tray (size sensing) Midwest Size-O-Matic
Cassette Size Sensing 18 cm (8 in.) minimum to 43 cm (17 in.) maximum
Bucky LF 8000 Series Superspeed reciprocating
TABLE 1-3
TABLE STATIONARY GRID CABINET SPECIFICATIONS
Longitudinal Travel in Table 448 mm (17-3/5 in.)
Grid 60 line/cm; 12:1 ratio; 100 cm focus
Cassette Tray (non size sensing) Midwest standard duty
1-3
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 1-2
SILHOUETTE HF GENERATOR
432 mm
(17 in.)
588 mm
(24 in.)
321 mm 4
(12 5/8 in.)
1613 mm
(63 1/2 in.)
211 mm
(8 5/16 in.)
533 mm
(21 in.)
1 2 3
559 mm
(22 in.)
203 mm
(8 in.)
1003 mm
(39 1/2 in.)
330 mm
(13 in.)
330 mm
(13 in.)
1 Front View
2 Side View
3 Rear View
4 Rear Access Panel
1-4
Service Manual
SECTION 3
GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS
The Silhouette HF generator is available in two single-phase input models (Standard and
Stored Energy) and two three-phase models (40 kW and 50 kW).
3-1 General Specifications
See Illustration 1-2 and Tables 1-4 and 1-5.
TABLE 1-4
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions Generator Cabinet Operator Control Panel

Height: 1613 mm (63-1/2 in.) 203 mm (8 in.)
Width: 588 mm (24 in.) 559 mm (22 in.)
Depth: 432 mm (17 in.) 330 mm (13 in.)
Weight: See Table 1-5 8 kg (17-1/2 lbs.)
9.3 kg (20-1/2 lbs.) with internal optional printer
Note: All specifications do not include measurement instrumentation accuracy.
TABLE 1-5
MODEL DEPENDENT SPECIFICATIONS
Stored Energy
Three Phase Generator
Standard Single Single Phase
Specification Phase Generator Generator
40 kW Transformer 50 kW Transformer
Maximum kW 37.5 37.5 40 50
kW @ 100 kV @ 0.1 sec. 30 30 40 50
kVp Range (1 kVp steps) 40 - 125
kVp Accuracy Greater than or equal to 40 ms: + 5%. Less than 40 ms: + 5% + 3kV.
mA Stations:
Small Focus 25, 75, 150 25, 75, 150 25, 75, 150
Large Focus 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 100, 150, 200, 250, 300 200, 300, 400, 500, 600
mA Accuracy Greater than or equal to 40 ms: + 10% or + 5 mA, whichever is greater

Less than 40 ms: + 12% or + 5 mA, whichever is greater
Time Range 5 milliseconds to 6 seconds, 200 steps

Time Accuracy + 1% + 3 milliseconds; Time is measured at the 90% level of peak kV
mAs Range 0.8 to 600 mAs
mAs Accuracy + 12% for time greater than or equal to 100 milliseconds and current greater than or equal to 50 mA;
otherwise accuracy is a product of time and mA accuracies.
Heat Energy Output Average 1936 BTU/hr (567 Watts)

Weight 181 kg (400 lbs.) 183 kg (402 lbs.) 199 kg (440 lbs.) 227 kg (456 lbs.)
Rotor Controller 60 Hz (Low Speed)
50/60 Hz (Low Speed) 50/60 Hz (Low Speed) 50/60 Hz (Low Speed)
180 Hz (High Speed)
1-5
Service Manual
3-2 Power Requirements

All electrical wiring/connections must be installed by a qualified electrician and conform
to national and local codes.
See Table 1-6 for Standard Single Phase Generators.
See Tables 1-7 and 1-8 for Three Phase Generators.
See Table 1-9 for Stored Energy Single Phase Generators.
TABLE 1-6
SILHOUETTE HF POWER SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS
Parameter Standard Single Phase Generator

Input Voltage 208 VAC 240 VAC
Wire Size Length: *
15 m (50 ft.) 70 mm2 #00 AWG 60 mm2 #0 AWG
30 m (100 ft.) 152 mm2 300 MCM 127 mm2 250 MCM
60 m (200 ft.) 304 mm2 600 MCM 253 mm2 500 MCM
Ground Wire 13 mm2 (#6 AWG)
Disconnect to Generator 42 mm2 (#1 AWG 90C)
(4.5 m/15 ft.)
Momentary Input Current 390 Amps 345 Amps
Long Term Input Current Less than 3 Amps
Line Regulation 7% @ full load
Line Voltage Fully automatic. Maximum overall line voltage variations (non-equipment related)
Compensation not to exceed + 5%
Service Rating 200 Amps
Distribution Transformer 50 KVA
Rating (Dedicated)
Line Resistance 0.04 ohms 0.05 ohms
* Note: Wire size from Distribution Transformer to Generator.
Input Voltage: 200-270 VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation)

Input Current: Maximum line current measured at 125 kVp, at the maximum kilowatt
output of the generator.
1-6
Service Manual
TABLE 1-7
SILHOUETTE HF POWER SPECIFICATIONS - 40 KW THREE PHASE GENERATORS
Parameter Three Phase Generator

Input Voltage 380 VAC 440 VAC 480 VAC
Wire Size Length: *
15 m (50 ft.) 21 mm2 #4 AWG 21 mm2 #4 AWG 21 mm2 #4 AWG
Ground Wire 13 mm2 (# 6 AWG)
Disconnect to Generator 13 mm2 (#6 AWG)
(4.5 m/15 ft.)
Momentary Input Current 115 Amps 98 Amps 90 Amps
Service Rating 60 Amps 50 Amps 50 Amps
Distribution Transformer 50 KVA 50 KVA 50 KVA
Rating (Dedicated)
Line Resistance 0.21 ohms 0.24 ohms 0.27 ohms

Voltage is three-phase measured line to line, balanced to neutral.
Input Voltage: 362 - 505 VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation).

Input Current: Maximum line current measured at the maximum kilowatt output of the
generator.
1-7
Service Manual
TABLE 1-8
SILHOUETTE HF POWER SPECIFICATIONS - 50 KW THREE-PHASE GENERATORS
Parameter Three Phase Generator

Input Voltage 380 VAC 440 VAC 480 VAC
Wire Size Length: *
46 m (150 ft.) 107 mm2 #0000 83 mm2 #000 AWG 83 mm2 #000 AWG
60 m (200 ft.) 127 mm2 AWG 107 mm2 #0000 107 mm2 #0000
#250 MCM AWG AWG
Ground Wire 13 mm2 (# 6 AWG)
Disconnect to Generator 21 mm2 (#4 AWG)
(4.5 m/15 ft.)
Momentary Input Current 140 Amps 120 Amps 110 Amps
Service Rating 70 Amps 60 Amps 60 Amps
Distribution Transformer 60 KVA 60 KVA 60 KVA
Rating (Dedicated)
Line Resistance 0.17 ohms 0.20 ohms 0.22 ohms

Voltage is three-phase measured line to line, balanced to neutral.
Input Voltage: 362 - 505 VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation).

Input Current: Maximum line current measured at the maximum kilowatt output of the
generator.
1-8
Service Manual
TABLE 1-9
SILHOUETTE HF POWER SPECIFICATIONS - SINGLE PHASE STORED ENERGY (SE) GENERATORS
Parameter Stored Energy Single Phase Generator

Input Voltage 105 - 130 VAC 50/60 Hz 220 - 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
2
Ground Wire 13 mm (#6 AWG) 13 mm2 (#6 AWG)
Momentary Input Current Less than 20 Amps during rotor Less than 10 Amps during rotor
start up time start up time
Long Term Amps Less than 6 Amps Less than 3 Amps
Line Regulation 10% @ 20 Amp load 10% @ 10 Amp load
Line Voltage Compensation Fully automatic. Maximum overall line voltage variations (non-equipment
related) not to exceed + 5%
3-2-1 United States Compliance Requirements

In the United States, requirements for health care facilities (National Electric Code NFPA
No. 70) must be followed.
See Table 1-10.
TABLE 1-10
UNITED STATES NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE REQUIREMENTS
Parameter Requirement Notes

Wires Copper
Wiring Insulation 50% of Momentary See Table 1-6, 1-7, 1-8,
Current or 1-9.
Fuses, Circuit 50% of Momentary See Table 1-6, 1-7, 1-8,
Breakers, Current or 1-9. Must be within
Disconnect Switches reach of Operator.
3-3 Tube and Collimator Compatibilities

See Table 1-11.
TABLE 1-11
TUBE AND COLLIMATOR COMPATIBILITY
Tube: Eureka: Emerald and Sapphire Series

Toshiba: E72 Series
Collimator: TREX Medical D-50M or D-70A Series
1-9
Service Manual
SECTION 4
TUBE STAND SPECIFICATIONS
See Table 1-12.

TABLE 1-12
TUBE STAND SPECIFICATIONS
Longitudinal Focal Spot Travel 2337 mm (92 in.)
Lateral Focal Spot Travel 248 mm (9-3/4 in.)
Vertical Focal Spot Travel (Beam Vertical) 1391 mm + 6 mm (54-3/4 in. + 1/4 in.)
438 mm to 1829 mm (17-3/4 in. to 72 in.)
Vertical Focal Spot Travel (Beam Horizontal) 1388 mm + 6 mm (54-3/5 in. + 1/4 in.)
426 mm to 1813 mm (16-3/4 in. to 71-3/8 in.)
Tube Stand Rotation + 180 degrees; detents at each 90 degree position
Tube Angulation + 180 degrees; detents at each 90 degree position
Floor Track Length 3048 mm (120 in.)
Vertical SID Scales Metric or English. Receptor and Table Top scales
Floor Track Weight 54.4 kg (120 lbs.)
Tube Stand Weight 164.4 kg (362 lbs.)
Minimum Wall to Floor Track centerline 248 mm (9-4/5 in.); Limits rotation to 90 degrees.
(Non-Tomo) 389 mm (15-5/16 in.); Limits rotation to 90 degrees.
Minimum Wall to Floor Track centerline (Tomo)
Floor Track centerline to Table centerline 743 mm + 6 mm (29-1/4 in. + 1/4 in.)
(Non-Tomo)
Floor Track centerline to Table centerline (Tomo) 1025.5 mm + 6 mm (40-3/8 in. + 1/4 in.)
1-10
Service Manual
SECTION 5
COLLIMATOR SPECIFICATIONS
5-1 Automatic Collimator

See Table 1-13.
TABLE 1-13
AUTOMATIC COLLIMATOR ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements 24 VAC, 200 VA, 60 Hz.
Indicator Assembly Indicator corresponds to the x-ray field size within 2% of the Source-to-Image
Distance (SID) used: 100 cm (40 in.), 180 cm (72 in.).
Light Field Accuracy Light field to x-ray field alignment within 2% of the SID used.
X-Ray Field Alignment Projected bucky light is centered to the x-ray field centerline within 2% of the SID
used.
X-Ray Field Accuracy When the Ready light is activated, the length and width dimensions of the x-ray field
correspond to the image receptor dimensions within 2% of the SID used (4% for the
sum of the length and width errors).
Light Projection Minimum fifteen (15) footcandles at one meter (40") with an edge contrast ratio of 4:1.
Minimum Filtration
Model D-70A 2.0 mm of aluminum @100 kVp.
Film Coverage: Continuously variable square/rectangular field from closed
up to 43 cm x 43 cm at 100 cm and 180 cm SID
(17 in. x 17 in. at 40 in. and 72 in. SID). 14 in. x 36 in. obtainable at 72 in. SID.
Projection Lamp 150 watt quartz iodide.
Lamp Timer 30 seconds (27 - 33 sec.)
Mounting Attaches directly to tube units listed in generator tube compatibility list.
Panel Lights Color-coded: Manual/amber, Exposure Hold/red, Ready/green.
Note: The above specifications are applicable only when Model D-70A is installed and
adjusted in accordance with the provided instructions.
1-11
Service Manual
5-2 Manual Collimator

See Table 1-14.
TABLE 1-14
MANUAL COLLIMATOR ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements 24 VAC, 150 VA, 60 Hz.
Indicator Assembly Indicator corresponds to the x-ray field size within 2% of the Source-to-Image
Distance (SID) used: 100 cm (40 in.) and 180 cm (72 in.).
Light Field Accuracy Light field to x-ray field alignment within 2% of the SID used.
X-Ray Field Alignment Projected bucky light is centered to the x-ray field centerline within 2% of the SID
used.
X-Ray Field Accuracy When the dial is set, the length and width dimensions of the x-ray field correspond to
the image receptor dimensions within 2% of the SID used (4% for the sum of the
length and width errors).
Light Projection Minimum fifteen (15) footcandles at one meter (40") with an edge contrast ratio of 4:1.
Minimum Filtration
Model D-50M 2.0 mm of aluminum equivalence @ 100 kVp.
Maximum Rated kVp
Model D-50M 150 kVp.
Film Coverage Continuously variable square/rectangular field from closed
up to 43 cm x 43 cm at 100 cm and 180 cm SID
(17 in. x 17 in. at 40 in. and 72 in. SID. 14 in. x 36 in. obtainable at 72 in. SID.
Projection Lamp 150 watt quartz iodide.
Lamp Timer 30 seconds (27 - 33 sec.)
Mounting Attaches directly to tube units listed in generator tube compatibility list.
Note: The above specifications are applicable only when Model D-50M collimator is installed
and adjusted in accordance with the provided instructions.
1-12
Service Manual
SECTION 6
VERTICAL WALL STAND SPECIFICATIONS
See Table 1-15.

TABLE 1-15
VERTICAL WALL STAND SPECIFICATIONS
Weight 113 kg (250 lbs.)
Film to Wall Distance without AEC 330 mm + 6 mm (13 in. + 1/4 in.)
Film to Wall Distance with AEC 318 mm + 6 mm (12-1/2 in. + 1/4 in.)
Vertical Travel (Film Centerline) 1349 mm + 6 mm (53 in. + 1/4 in.)
Vertical Travel (Centerline Minimum to Maximum) 362 mm to 1711 mm (14-1/4 in. to 67-3/8 in.)
Bucky LF 8000 Series Superspeed reciprocating
Bucky Grid 40 line/cm; 10:1 ratio; 180 cm focus
Stationary Grid 60 line/cm; 10:1 ratio; 180 cm focus
Cassette Tray (non-size sensing) Midwest standard duty
Cassette Load Right Hand (Left hand load field configurable)
1-13
Service Manual
SECTION 7
X-RAY TUBE SPECIFICATIONS
7-1 BXT 202 X-Ray Tube Specifications.

The BXT 202 X-Ray Tube is used in Single-Phase and Three-Phase 40 kW Systems. See
Table 1-16.
TABLE 1-16
BXT 202 X-RAY TUBE SPECIFICATIONS
Type Rotating Anode (Low Speed only)
kVp Capacity 125 kVp
Focal Spots 0.6 mm and 1.5 mm
Target Angle 14 Degrees
Anode HU Capacity 200,000 HU (148,000 J)
Cooling Rate 50,000 HU/min. (616 Ws)
Insert Filtration Greater than 0.7 mm Aluminum equivalency at 100
kVp
7-2 BXT 14100 X-Ray Tube Specifications

The BXT 14100 X-Ray Tube is used in all 50 kW Systems. See Table 1-17.
TABLE 1-17
BXT 14100 X-RAY TUBE SPECIFICATIONS
Type Rotating Anode (Low Speed and High Speed)
kVp Capacity 150 kVp
Focal Spots 0.6 mm and 1.2 mm
Target Angle 12 Degrees
Anode HU Capacity 300,000 HU (210,000 J)
Cooling Rate 40,000 HU/min. (475 Ws)
Insert Filtration Greater than 0.7 mm Aluminum equivalency at 100
kVp
1-14
Service Manual
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SECTION 1
TABLE
Preparing the table for operation requires the completion of the following tasks:
Positioning the Table
Making the Electrical Connections
Alignment Procedures
Cassette Grid Insertion
Table Top Installation
Checking Operations
Mounting the Table to the Floor
The table is shipped with its major components fully assembled as shown in Illustration
2-1 below.
ILLUSTRATION 2-1
TABLE ON SHIPPING CRATE
The table top assembly must be attached to the base assembly. To obtain the smoothest
and most quiet ride of the table top, adjustments may be made if necessary to the table
top bearings. These adjustments are made to precise specifications at the factory prior to
shipping, but shipping and handling may make minor fine tuning adjustments
necessary after the table is assembled.
1-1 Table Top Adjustments
Note: Before adjusting table top, remove table top, turn top around to opposite side, and
re-install top. If table top still does not ride smoothly, proceed as follows:
While viewing the underside of the table top, move the table top back and forth. Check
the bearings that ride horizontally (eccentric bearings) for looseness or tightness. If
eccentric bearings are loose, adjust eccentric bearings out. If bearing are too tight, adjust
eccentric bearings in.
2-1
Service Manual
1-1-1 Adjusting Eccentric Bearings Out

1. Remove end trim bracket.
2. Slide rail until eccentric bearing is visible.
3. Adjust eccentric bearing out using 5/32 T-handle Allen wrench.
1-1-2 Adjusting Eccentric Bearings In
1. Remove end trim bracket.
2. Slide rail until eccentric bearing is visible.
3. Adjust eccentric bearing in using 5/32 T-handle Allen wrench.
After the table is assembled, an operational check is performed with adjustments made to
the Up/Down Limit Board if a correction in table height is necessary (this check is
required only for the Hi-Lo Tables).
2-2
Service Manual
1-2 Positioning the Table Base

When positioning the table base, ensure that the minimum clearance on either side of the
table from the end bearing to the wall (refer to Illustration 2-2) is as follows:
Note: If using the Tomography Option, refer to the Tomography Option Service Manual for
minimum clearances.
82" for B-180M4F and B-180M6F tables

92" for the B-190M4F and B-190M6F tables
ILLUSTRATION 2-2
TABLE POSITION RELATIVE TO TUBESTAND
This will allow for the installation of the table top rails on the end bearings when the
table is mounted. If the room does not have enough clearance on either side to install
the table top after the table is mounted to the floor, the table top must be installed
before mounting the table to the floor. The distance between the tubestand floor track
rails (underneath the floor track) and the table base is 6.5" fork mount and 7.5" for
trunnion mount. To install the table top, proceed to section 1-6-1, Table Top Installation.
If enough clearance is provided, proceed to section 1-3 , Electrical Connections.
2-3
Service Manual
1-3 Electrical Connections

The table's printed circuit boards and associated internal wiring is factory pre-wired and
the table is shipped with this circuitry already mounted as shown in Illustration 2-3
below. No connections are required to enable the internal circuitry.
Note: Illustration 2-3 is applicable for Hi-Lo Elevating Tables only.
ILLUSTRATION 2-3
CIRCUIT BOARDS AND ASSOCIATED INTERNAL WIRING
Note: Remove the Access Cover near the center of the base if required to run wiring through
the base of the table.
2-4
Service Manual
1-3-1 Four-Way Tables

1. To connect the external wires to the table, either bring the cables through the rear
access openings or, if conduit is run under the floor, through the large 6" x 5" opening
near the center of the base. Route the input power cable to the fuse block located on
the table base (refer to Illustration 2-5). Terminal block TB1 is for the bucky power
and TB2 is for bucky collimator sensing cable (refer to Illustration 2-4).
ILLUSTRATION 2-4
BUCKY POWER CABLE, BUCKY COLLIMATOR SENSING CABLE AND GROUND CONNECTIONS
2. Dress cables along already existing cables and connect forked terminals to terminal
blocks as shown.
2-5
Service Manual
1-3-2 Hi-Lo Elevating (Six-Way) Tables

1. To connect the external wires to the table, either bring the cables through the rear
access openings or, if conduit is run under the floor, through the large 6" x 5" opening
near the center of the base. Route input power cable to the fuse block located near the
Six-Way Logic Board (refer to Illustration 2-5). TB1 is for the bucky power and TB2
is for the bucky collimator sensing cable. Refer to Illustration 2-4. Verify all external
wire connections using system interconnect diagram.
2. Dress cables along already existing cables and connect forked terminals to terminal
blocks as shown.
ILLUSTRATION 2-5
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR LOW DOSE TABLES
1-3-3 Emergency Stop Switch

Six-way tables are shipped with the Emergency Stop switch mounted to the Transverse
assembly in a recessed position to avoid damage in transit (see Figure 2-5A). To mount
the switch to the left Transverse Assembly, proceed as follows:
Note: The Emergency Stop switch may alternatively be mounted to the right Transverse
Assembly (e.g. when tomography system console is attached to the left Transverse
Assembly).
1. Remove any packing material and the four (4) screws securing Emergency Stop
Switch Assembly Cover to Switch Bracket and remove Cover.
2. Loosen the three (3) screws securing the Switch Bracket to the Transverse Assembly.
Slide Switch Bracket forward in the slotted holes and re-tighten the three (3) screws.
3. Re-install Emergency Switch Assembly Cover on Switch Bracket using the four (4)
screws previously removed.
2-6
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-5A
EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH (SHIPPING POSITION)
SLOTTED MOUNTING HOLES- LOOSEN

SCREWS, SLIDE BRACKET FORWARD AND TIGHTEN
STOPSWNEW.cdr
1-3-4 AEC Chamber

The ion chamber cable is installed in the table from the factory. No field installation is
required.
ILLUSTRATION 2-6
AEC CABLE ROUTING
AEC CABLE
2-7
Service Manual

ILLUSTRATION 2-9
AEC CABLE ROUTING ALONG CROSS BRACKETS
AEC CABLE CABLE TIES
ILLUSTRATION 2-8
AEC CABLE ROUTING (VIEWED FROM LOWER RIGHT CORNER)
CABLE CLAMP
REAR OF TABLE
SLOT
2-8
Service Manual
1-3-5 Magnet Locations

The table is equipped with five (5) 24 VDC magnets and four (4) solenoid-operated tilt
locks for transverse locking; one magnet is dedicated to the bucky housing. Refer to
Illustration 2-9 for magnet locations.
1-3-5-1 Foot Pedal Controls
When any four-way float pedal is depressed, all four longitudinal magnets are
de-energized and the transverse solenoids are energized, allowing the table top to move
freely in any direction. Releasing the foot pedal energizes the magnets, locking the table
top securely.
1-3-5-2 Adjustment Procedures
Each magnet has been factory adjusted to precise specifications and requires no further
adjustment.
ILLUSTRATION 2-9
MAGNET LOCATIONS
1-4 Alignment Procedures

1-4-1 Table Leveling
Before aligning the table to the collimator light field, the table must be level to the floor.
This is achieved by adding flat shim plates under the 1/2" aluminum base plate. The
shims, which measure approximately 3" x 5", are included in the Shim Kit, P/N 103256.
Note: Be sure tubestand is plumb and collimator is level before shimming table.
1. Move the entire table under the collimator, positioning the tray center as close to the
cross-center spot as possible.
2. Place a level on the table or bucky. A double-bubble level at least 18" long is
recommended.
3. If the table is not perfectly level, place the flat shim plates near the mounting
locations as required until the table or bucky reads level.
2-9
Service Manual
1-4-2 Bucky/Collimator Alignment
Note: The following procedures for Bucky/Collimator Alignment may require slight
repositioning of the table base. This movement may affect the position or arrangement of
the leveling plates, requiring an additional check prior to the final table mounting.
Collimator calibration, tubestand/collimator alignments and collimator light field to x-ray

field adjustments, as described in their respective manuals, must be performed prior to
the following procedure.
1. If the table top is installed, remove the table top (the radiographic portion) by
removing the three screws at each end of the table top underside. Then take the table
top out of the frame. Otherwise, proceed to step 2.
2. With the collimator parallel to the table top (0), turn on the collimator light and, using
the light field adjusting knobs on the collimator, reduce the light field to a narrow
beam of light along the length of the table.
3. Position the collimator to approximately 24" SID. (Source-to-Image- Distance).
4. Insert a 14" x 17" cassette into the bucky tray.
5. Turn on power to the table.
6. Turn on the collimator light and move the entire table so that the longitudinal center
line on the cassette, i.e., the line which is parallel to the length of the table, is properly
aligned with the narrow beam of light as shown in Illustration 2-10.
ILLUSTRATION 2-10
BUCKY/COLLIMATOR LIGHT FIELD ALIGNMENT
2-10
Service Manual
7. Move the tubestand and bucky simultaneously to check for continuous alignment of
the narrow beam of light to the cassette center line as shown in Illustration 2-11.
ILLUSTRATION 2-11
CASSETTE CENTER LINE
Note: Since the bucky has previously been squared to the bucky rails, any deviation from
alignment may be due to inaccurate alignment of either the tubestand or collimator. If
necessary, refer to the appropriate manual and repeat alignment procedures.
Note: Light field to x-ray field alignment should be performed before this step.
8. If the light beam and cassette center line are in proper alignment, mount the table
through the 3/8" diameter holes in the front and back (be sure that the leveling shim
plates are in the proper position). Use hardware suitable for the type of floor in the
installation and of sufficient strength to handle 500 lb. tensile loading.
9. Position the collimator at 40" Source-to-Image-Distance (SID.). Position the bucky
tray handle so it protrudes over the front opening. Turn on the collimator light. Check
for proper alignment of the bucky centering light (emitted by the collimator) with the
notch in the cassette tray handle. If misaligned, refer to the collimator manual for
alignment procedures.
1-4-3 For Positive Beam Limitation (PBL) Collimators and Elevating Tables Only
Note: When using a Midwest Tray and Liebel-Flarsheim Bucky, ensure that the receptacle
assembly and pin-and-pad (located at the rear of the bucky) are correctly aligned. If not,
refer to the respective Midwest Size Sensing Tray and Liebel-Flarsheim Bucky
Installation and Service manuals.
1. Place a 14" x 17" cassette into the cassette tray and insert the cassette tray into the
table bucky.
2. Turn on the generator.
3. Raise the table until it stops.
4. Position the collimator to 40" SID. to bucky. (40" SID. light on handgrips should turn
on.)
5. Collimator "READY" lights should be illuminated at this point.
6. Depress the Down foot pedal. The READY lights should extinguish as the red
EXPOSURE HOLD light turns on.
7. Try to take an x-ray exposure and verify that no exposure is possible.
2-11
Service Manual
1-5 Cassette/Grid Insertion

To insert the cassette/grid, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the four metal tabs in each corner of the grid frame (refer to Illustration 2-12).
ILLUSTRATION 2-12
GRID FRAME TABS
TABS (4)
2. Remove two of the metal tabs and then loosen the remaining other two.
3. Position the grid evenly under the tabs.
4. Reinstall the removed tabs and secure all four. When installed properly, the grid
should appear as shown in Illustration 2-13.
ILLUSTRATION 2-13
GRID INSTALLED
2-12
Service Manual
1-6 Table Top Assembly/Installation

The following procedures describe how to install the table top on the table and how to
re-install the radiographic portion of the table top in those cases where removal was
required.
1-6-1 Table Top Installation
The table top is installed as follows:
1. Remove the table base from the shipping carton and position it as close to the center
of the collimator light field as possible.
2. Unpack the table top from the carton. Remove the end trim piece from one side of the
table top assembly. This consists of removing the two (2) 1/4-20 low profile socket
heads which sit in the counterbores on the face of the trim piece. Next, remove the
three (3) 10-32 pan head screws which attach the trim to the underside of the table
top.
3. Slide the table top assembly onto the bearing assemblies from one end.
4. Re-attach the trim to the table top assembly. Remove the trim buttons from the
shipping bag. Place a trim button into each counterbored hole, covering the low
profile socket heads.
1-6-1-1 Re-installing the Radiographic Portion of Table Top
Place the radiographic portion of the table top in the table frame and install the two
screws in the underside of the table top at each end.
1-7 Operational Check
When the assembly and electrical connections have been completed, perform the
following tests to verify the table's travel and vertical operations. Tests for the table's
elevating function is required only for models B-180M6F and B-190M6F.
1-7-1 Check the Float Operation
Depress the four-way float pedal. The table top should move freely in either direction.
Release the foot pedal. This energizes the four longitudinal magnets, locking the table top
securely.
Note: Depressing the bucky switch should release the bucky magnet only.
1-7-2 Check the Up/Down Pedals

Depress the Up and then the Down foot pedal. The following should occur while the foot
pedal is depressed:
1. The table top should start to move either up or down according to which foot pedal is
depressed.
2. The four-way float foot pedal (the outside pedals) should be INACTIVE (the table
top four-way floating action should remain locked) while the table top is in motion.
2-13
Service Manual
1-7-3 Check the Table Position

Position the table top into its approximate central position. Lower the table top until it
stops. The table top should measure approximately 20" from the floor. While the table is
in its lowest position, the four-way float foot pedal should remain inactive. Now raise the
table top until it stops. The table top should measure approximately 31 1/2" from the
floor. Refer to Illustration 2-14.
ILLUSTRATION 2-14
TABLETOP POSITIONS
If a modification in the height limits (lower and upper) is required to meet these
specifications, it is necessary to adjust the Up/Down Limit Board located at the front of
the base.
1-7-4 Adjusting the Up/Down Limit Board
Loosen the three (3) screws holding down the Up/Down Limit Board. Move the board to
the left to increase the maximum height and to the right to decrease the maximum height.
When these adjustments have been completed, retighten the screws. Refer to Illustration
2-15 to see the location of the Up/Down Limit Board.
ILLUSTRATION 2-15
UP/DOWN LIMIT BOARD
2-14
Service Manual
1-8 Cover Assembly/Adjustment Procedures

1-8-1 For Models B-180M6F and B-190M6F Only
The following procedures are required for tables with the elevating function; the purpose
is to properly assemble the lower covers to the table to provide adequate clearance for the
top covers. Proceed as follows after completing all wiring, alignment, and assembly
operations:
1. Loosen the attached four (4) kep nuts on mounting studs at base of table. Assemble
the front and rear lower covers to mounting studs located on the base (refer to
Illustration 2-16). Shift covers on the studs as far into the slots as possible. Tighten
the kep nuts.
ILLUSTRATION 2-16
BOTTOM COVERS INSTALLATION
2. Remove the six (6) attached kep nuts from studs at the top corners of the front and
rear covers. Attach side cover supports to studs on the front and rear covers. Reattach
and tighten the kep nuts.
3. Install lower side covers and slightly loosen all kep nuts to permit the following
adjustment:
Adjust front and rear covers to produce even side cover and front cover seams. Try to
engage the stud into the slot as far as possible. Tighten all the kep nuts.
4. Test-run the table to its lowest position while checking for interference between
frame and lower covers. Adjust covers as necessary.
5. Assemble and tighten top front and rear covers to table top base [three (3) 8-32 button
head screws supplied per cover]. (Refer to Illustration 2-17.)
2-15
Service Manual

ILLUSTRATION 2-17
TOP COVERS INSTALLATION
6. Assemble top front and rear covers to table top base [two (2) 8-32 button head screws
supplied per cover]. Do not tighten. Screw front, rear and side covers together using
6-32 flat head screws at lower corners.
7. Shift front and rear covers as far outward from the center of the table as possible
while maintaining even side cover/front cover seams. Tighten the 8-32 button head
screws.
2-16
Service Manual
SECTION 2
GENERATOR
2-1 Overview
This section provides procedures for installing the Silhouette HF generator, from
pre-installation guidelines to the final system inspection prior to operation. These
procedures should be reviewed carefully before beginning the actual installation.
Installation procedures should be performed by trained, qualified
personnel only.
WARNING
2-2 Pre-installation Guidelines

While site planning is the customer's responsibility, the following are recommended
guidelines.
2-2-1 Verify Space/location Of Equipment
In radiology site preparation, it is essential to verify that the location and space allocated
for the equipment is sufficient. Please refer to Illustration 2-18 for the Silhouette HF
Generator dimensions; this diagram specifically references the access panels and cable
openings to assist you in this effort.
The room plan should show the following for the equipment:
All working and parked positions
Overall dimensions
Total equipment weights and power outputs
Structural mounting and attachment methods
2-17
Service Manual

ILLUSTRATION 2-18
SILHOUETTE HF GENERATOR DIMENSIONS
CONTROL
BACK
COMPLIANCE
LABEL
COMPLIANCE
LABEL
GENERATOR GENERATOR GEN_CAB_DIMS.CDR
FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE

2-2-2 Electrical Requirements
In addition to providing for the physical requirements of the equipment, it is also vital to
prepare for the power requirements. Please refer to Chapter 1, Specifications, for Power
Requirements and model dependent power specifications. This information is used to
prepare the system wiring and cabling.
2-3 Installation Procedures
The installation may be divided into the following tasks:
Installing/connecting the equipment
Powering the system
Calibrating the system
Verifying programmed techniques
Inspecting the system
2-18
Service Manual
2-3-1 Installing/Connecting the Equipment

2-3-1-1 Generator Cabinet
The Silhouette HF series generators are shipped in three crates. Open the crate or carton
marked packing list enclosed first. Remove the packing list and use as a guide to open
the remaining cartons. Do not dispose of the packing material until the packing list is
matched with the actual parts received. Should there be a shortage or damage, notify the
manufacturer immediately.
1. Stand the unit up and place it as close to the final location as possible.
2. Remove the covers from the cabinet as necessary to gain access to the top equipment
shelf, microprocessor pull-down tray and input transformer bus bar.
Note: When installing SE units only, the connectors at A11J1 and if applicable, A14J1, must be
connected to their respective locations on the Source Charger Boards.
3. Locate the Operator Control Panel and place to the side.

4. If there are any loose wires resting on the top shelf, drape them across the side of
cabinet.
5. Locate the two tank clamps on the top shelf and ensure that they are in full open
position. Open as necessary.
Caution: When unpacking and installing the high voltage tanks,

do not turn them on their side. Keep tanks upright at all
times.
2-19
Service Manual
2-3-1-2 High Voltage Tanks

Place H.V. tanks on the top equipment shelf, inside the clamps. When facing the front of
the unit, Anode tank should be on right side, Cathode tank on left side.
1. Locate ground wires for each tank (yellow/green, yellow/green and purple for anode;
yellow/green and yellow/green for cathode) and securely fasten to ground lug (GND) on
tank with 8/32 kep nut.
2. Connect black and red #10-gauge input wires from backup contactor to input
connections (P1 and P2) on both tanks, respectively. Tighten securely.
3. Connect the three filament wires green/white, orange/white and blue/white to cathode tank
(LARGE, SMALL and COM). Ensure connections are secure.
4. Connect shielded two-wire feed back sense leads to each tank. White wire to HIGH
terminal and black wire to LOW terminal.
5. Connect purple/white wire to MA connector on anode tank.
6. Connect high voltage output cables (anode and cathode) to each tank and secure. Be sure to
use the silicone grease supplied with the cables.
7. Tighten tank clamps securely.
8. Place cover plates around the high tension cables on the outside of the cabinet in
order to close off large openings. Refer to Illustration 2-19.
ILLUSTRATION 2-19
HIGH VOLTAGE TANK CONNECTIONS
BLUE/WHITE
GREEN/WHITE PURPLE/WHITE
HV OUTPUT ORANGE/WHITE HV OUTPUT

LARGE BLACK
(SHIELDED)
COM SMALL
LOW
BLACK LOW
(SHIELDED)
WHITE MA
HIGH (SHIELDED) HIGH
GND P2 GND P2
WHITE
P1 YEL/GRN, P1
(SHIELDED)
YEL/GRN,
YEL/GRN PURPLE
and
YEL/GRN
CATHODE ANODE
ONE OR TWO RED
#10-GAUGE WIRE(S)
CATHODE H.V. TANK TWO BLACK ANODE H.V. TANK

#10-GAUGE WIRES TANKS.EPS
2-3-1-3 Operator Control Panel

Remove the Operator Control Panel from its shipping box. The OCP is provided with a
50-ft interconnect cable.
2-20
Service Manual
2-3-2 Mounting Procedures

2-3-2-1 For Shelf- or Table- Mounting
The OCP can be placed directly on the shelf or table top, resting on its rubber-tipped
feet, or it can be placed on the supplied wall mount.
It can be permanently mounted in place; refer to Illustration 2-20 for connection
procedures.
ILLUSTRATION 2-20
OCP: SHELF/TABLE MOUNT INSTALLATION
2-21
Service Manual
2-3-2-2 For Optional Pedestal Mounting

The pedestal can be mounted to the floor or the wall; refer to Illustration 2-21 for
connection procedures.
ILLUSTRATION 2-21
OCP: PEDESTAL MOUNT INSTALLATION
2-22
Service Manual
2-3-2-3 Cabling
Route cable and attach to system; refer to either Illustration 2-20 or 2-21, according to
your system requirements.
Connect cable from A12 A1-J1 (Front Panel Display Board) to A15-J2 (Serial
Interface Board).
2-3-3 Assembly Installations
2-3-3-3 Bucky/Collimator Interconnections
In general, bucky, table and tube housing assemblies are interconnected to the Silhouette
HF generator via the INTERCONNECT PANEL (A13). Table 2-1 provides cable color
codes and terminal connection data. Install the bucky according to the instructions
provided with the bucky. Illustration 2-22 is the interconnection diagram for the bucky.
Refer to Chapter 8, Schematics for collimator interconnection diagrams.
Note: If a reciprocating bucky is installed in the table (BUCKY 1), the jumper connection on
black Bakelite panel A13 at COM 1 and CONT must be removed. If a reciprocating
bucky is installed in the wall (BUCKY 2), the jumper connection on black bakelite panel
A13 at COM 2 and CONT must be removed. For systems with grid, this jumper is
required. Otherwise, bucky error message appears.
2-23
Service Manual

TABLE 2-1
CABLE COLOR CODES AND TERMINAL CONNECTION
Cable Description Gauge Wire Color Connection
Rotor 18 Black A 13/7

Rotor 18 Green A 13/8
Rotor 18 White A 13/9
24 VAC Power Supply (#4) 6.5-amp Maximum 16 Yellow/Green GROUND
24 VAC Power Supply (#4) 6.5-amp Maximum 16 White A 13/1 (24 VAC)
24 VAC Power Supply (#4) 5-amp Maximum 16 Black A 13/2 (24 VAC)
Bucky (#5) 18 Green A 13/COMMON 1
Bucky (#5) 18 Black A 13/0 VAC
Bucky (#5) 18 White A 13/CONT
Bucky (#5) 18 Red A 13/120
Exposure Hold (#6) 20 Black A 1/TB1-4
Exposure Hold (#6) 20 Red A 1/TB1-3
30 VDC Power Supply (#7) 2.5-amp Maximum 22 Black A 13/4
30 VDC Power Supply (#7) 2.5-amp Maximum 22 Red A 13/5
30 VDC Power Supply (#7) 2.5-amp Maximum 22 White A 13/6
Bucky 2 (#8) 18 Green A 13/COMMON 2
Bucky 2 (#8) 18 Black A 13/0 VAC
Bucky 2 (#8) 18 White A 13/CONT
Bucky 2 (#8) 18 Red A 13/120
2-24
Service Manual

ILLUSTRATION 2-22
BUCKY INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
Note: Reference the interconnect maps location in the Chapter 8, Schematics, Section 1.
2-25
Service Manual
2-4 Powering the System

2-4-3 Power Connections
1. Non-SE versions require a line disconnect box (or according to your local code)
before the x-ray generator. This switch should be within reach of the operator. A
separate earth ground, #6 AWG insulated wire, must be installed. This wire must be
the only wire connected to the ground terminal.
2. SE versions can be plugged into a standard switched 110 VAC grounded receptacle.
Receptacle switch should be within reach of the OCP. The Silhouette HF (SE) is
factory wired for 120 VAC operation. If it is necessary to wire for 240 VAC
operation, refer to Illustration 2-25a (for CE mark systems only) and NOTE A on the
unit Interconnect Diagram.
2-4-4 Verify Input Power Procedures
1. Using a calibrated DVM, measure the input line voltage: SE models can operate
between 105 and 130 VAC, single-phase models between 200 and 270 VAC, and
three-phase models between 380 and 480 VAC.
2. Adjust transformer bus bar(s) to match the input line voltage as closely as possible.
Refer to Illustrations 2-23, 2-24, and 2-25 for bus bar configurations.
3. On single-phase non-SE models, the correct bus bar(s) location will yield 235 to 245
VAC measured between the 0 terminal and the 240V terminal. On three-phase
models, the correct bus bars location will yield 430 to 450 VAC measured between
each pair of 440 VAC taps.
4. For non-SE models, it is necessary to insure that the line resistance meets
requirements as stated in Section 2, General Information. To measure line resistance,
use one of the following procedures:
a. Connect a mains resistance measuring instrument to the incoming line and
measure resistance (measure each phase of three-phase line).
b. If a mains resistance measuring instrument is not available, determine resistance
as follows:
Connect a known load resistance Rd (e.g., 2.75 ohms for 220V or 5 ohms for
440V, capable of being loaded up to 80 amps) in series with a switch across each
incoming line. Connect a voltmeter in parallel to this arrangement.
Measure unloaded voltage Eo; then connect resistor Rd into circuit and measure
loaded voltage Eb. Repeat measurement several times to establish mean values.
Calculate total mains resistance RL between two phases as follows:
(Eo - Eb) 2.75 (220 - 218) 5.5
RL = Example: = = .025
Eo 218 218
RL = Line Resistance
Eo = No Load Voltage
Eb = Load Voltage
Rd = Load Resistance (see mains resistance measuring device for Rd value)
c. Using the generator as a load:
Measure the incoming line voltage with your DVM. Record the voltage measured.
Select 200mA, 50KV and a time of 3-5 seconds.
Connect your DVM to the incoming line. Make an exposure and record the
voltage measured (10kw exposure).
2-26
Service Manual
Calculate the line drop percentage at full load by using the following formula:
(Eo - Eb)
LD = x 3.7 = Maximum Line Drop @37.5kw
Eo
LD = Line drop
Eo = No load voltage
Eb = 10kw load voltage
If the maximum line drop at 37.5 kw exceeds 7% of line voltage, the line does not
meet specifications.
d. Refer to Section 2, General Information, for the maximum acceptable line
resistance; if line resistance exceeds the specification, then the unit must be
derated. Please refer to Chapter 2, Section 2-10, System Configuration Mode, for
derating procedure.
ILLUSTRATION 2-23
SINGLE-PHASE LINE TAP PANEL USED IN THE HFQ-3000P, HFQ-4500P, AND HFQ-6000P
2-27
Service Manual

ILLUSTRATION 2-25
THREE-PHASE LINE TAP PANEL USED IN THE HFQ-8000P, HFQ-10000P, HFQ-12000P, AND HFQ-12050
ILLUSTRATION 2-24
TERMINAL/FUSE PANEL USED WITH THE STORED ENERGY MODEL (NON-CE MARK SYSTEMS, S/N BELOW 34000)
2-5 Calibrating the System

After installation, the system must undergo a series of electrical checks. These are
required to validate system compliance. Refer to Chapter 3, Calibration, and proceed to
calibrate the Silhouette HF generator.
2-6 Verifying Programmed Techniques
After the calibration procedures have been completed, check the factory programmed
techniques for individual suitability. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 2-4, Programming, for
procedures to edit existing techniques or write new ones, as needed.
2-28
Service Manual

ILLUSTRATION 2-25a
TERMINAL/FUSE PANEL USED WITH THE STORED ENERGY MODEL (CE MARK SYSTEMS, S/N 34000 AND UP)
TERMINAL BLOCK WIRING DIAGRAM

P/O FOR INPUT CONNECT TERM. BLOCKS
TERM. BLK. #24 XMFR T1 LINE VOLTAGE: AS FOLLOWS:
BOTTOM 231-260 VAC 5A
105 - 116 VAC A9E2 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #24 (TOP)
MIDDLE 200-230 VAC 5 A9E4 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #23 (BOTTOM)
FROM
A9E2 TOP 105-130 VAC 4
117 - 130 VAC A9E2 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #24 (TOP)
A9E4 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #23 (TOP)
TERM. BLK. #23 200 - 230 VAC A9E2 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #24 (MIDDLE)
A9E4 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #23 (BOTTOM)
BOTTOM 0 VAC 2
FROM TOP +10 VAC 1 231 - 260 VAC A9E2 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #24 (BOTTOM)
A9E4 A9E4 WIRE TO TERM. BLK. #23 (TOP)
TAP 5A
TAP 5 TO TRANSFORMER T1
TAP 1
TO TRANSFORMER T1
TAP 4 TAP 2
TERMINAL BLOCK #24 TERMINAL BLOCK #23

0
+10
TOP BOTTOM
(USE FOR 105-116 OR (USE FOR 105-116 OR
117-130 VAC INPUTS) 200-230 VAC INPUTS)
FROM POWER FROM POWER
MIDDLE (USE FOR SHUTOFF BOARD A9, TOP SHUTOFF BOARD A9,
200-230 VAC INPUT) TERMINAL E2 (USE FOR 117-130 OR TERMINAL E4
231-260 VAC INPUTS)
BOTTOM (USE FOR
231-260 VAC INPUT)
A9E4 WIRE
A9E2 WIRE
MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCKS (P/O A13)

(SIDE VIEW)
TERMBLK.EPS
2-28a
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-25b
DIN RAIL (A13) LAYOUT - NON-SE MODELS
(FUSE HOLDERS CONTAIN 1 SPARE FUSE)
7A SB
DINRAIL2.EPS
2-28b
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-25c
DIN RAIL (A13) LAYOUT - SE MODEL
(FUSE HOLDERS CONTAIN 1 SPARE FUSE)
7A SB
TERMINAL #23
TERMINAL #24
DINRAIL.EPS
2-28c
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-25d
DIN RAIL (A13) LAYOUT - HSS MODEL
7A SB
DINRAIL3.CDR
2-28d
Service Manual
2-7 Connection to Room Warning Light

1. Connect wires from in use light to terminals TB1-1 and TB1-2 on Room Warning
Light Printed Circuit Board A3A1, which is located in the x-ray generator cabinet
(mounted to connector J9 on Microprocessor Board A3).
2-8 PBL/Door Interlock Interconnection
1. For systems using the x-ray room door interlock feature, remove the jumper between
terminals TB1-1 and TB1-2 on Interface Board A1. Connect wires from door
interlock switch to A1TB1-1 and A1TB1-2. If two-tube switch is used, repeat
previous step using A1TB2-1 and A1TB2-2.
2. When exposure hold interlock is used (PBL), connect PBL cable #6 red and black
wires to terminals TB1-3 and TB1-4, respectively, on Interface Board A1.
2-9 Inspecting the System
1. Replace all cabinet covers; ensure that the cover plates are placed around the high
tension cables on the outside of the generator cabinet as shown in Illustration 2-26.
2. Ensure that the cabinet is securely positioned.
3. Check all controls and indicators to verify operation.
4. Complete the required paperwork:
Assembler's Report, Federal Form FD-2579
Installation Quality Assurance Checklist
Installation Report
HHS Report
Once the system has passed this final inspection, the installation is complete and the
system is ready for operation.
ILLUSTRATION 2-26
CABINET TOP CABLE ASSEMBLY
2-29
Service Manual
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
2-30
Service Manual
SECTION 3
COLLIMATOR
3-1 D70A (Automatic Collimator)

3-1-1 Overview
This section provides the procedures for installing the D-70A Collimator.
3-1-1-1 Required Tools and Materials
In addition to such standard hand tools as screwdrivers and wrenches, the following tools
and materials are required to perform the installation procedures:
Jeweler screwdriver (for slotted screws)
.050" hex key
1/16" hex driver
3-1-2 Procedures
The following procedures should be reviewed completely before beginning the actual
installation.
Note: Alteration of any circuit, junction or component or addition of any of the above without
the expressed written consent of Dial-X Instruments will void any applicable warranty of
certification.
3-1-2-1 Collimator Mounting Instructions

Collimator mounting consists of removing the mounting ring and plate assembly from
the collimator, fastening the ring to the x-ray tube port boss and then attaching the
collimator to the plate.
1. Remove the mounting ring and plate assembly from the top of the collimator by
removing the four (4) 10 x 32 cap nuts located in the four corners of the plate. Refer
to Illustration 2-27.
2. Select the required amount of spacers and mounting hardware from the material
supplied. Use the proper size screw length to insure that the mounting screws engage
at least five threads (1/4") into the x-ray tube port boss. Refer to Illustration 2-27.
3. Attach the mounting ring assembly to the x-ray tube (Illustration 2-27). The mounting
screws (1/4-20) should be installed with lock washers provided, through the holes
provided in the mounting ring (and tube support if applicable) into the tube port boss.
Make sure you have placed the required amount of spacers between the mounting
ring and the tube port boss. Tighten the screws securely.
4. Attach collimator to mounting plate assembly "A" using four (4) 10 x 32 cap nuts.
Refer to Illustration 2-27.
2-31
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-27
COLLIMATOR MOUNTING
X-RAY TUBE
PORT BOSS OPENING

SPACERS
(IF TOSHIBA TUBE,
INSTALL ABOVE FORK)
MOUNTING FORK
(HANDGRIP MOUNTING
PLATE, IF TRUNNION)
SPACERS
(IF EUREKA TUBE,
10-32 CAP NUTS (4X) INSTALL BELOW FORK)
MOUNTING PLATE
ASSEMBLY
LOCKWASHERS
1/4-20 BOLTS
(USE 6 mm x 30 mm
WHEN TOSHIBA OR COLLIMATOR
IAE TUBE IS USED)
COLLIMATOR
(TOP VIEW)
NOTE:
IF SWIVEL COLLIMATOR
MOUNT IS USED WITH
A TRUNNION MOUNTED
TUBE, THE KNURLED
KNOB HANDLE MUST BE
ORIENTED AS SHOWN
ABOVE
003.CDR
2-32
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-28
MOUNTING ADAPTER SPACING REQUIREMENTS
Focal Spot
3" (+1/8", -0")
Mounting Mounting Ring Top of

Plate Collimator
2-33
Service Manual
3-1-2-2 Setting SID to the Bucky

Determine the location of the focal spot of the tube. Refer to the manufacturer's tube
specifications.
1. Determine the distance from the top of the cassette in the tray to the table top by
measuring 2-1/4".
2. Subtract this measurement from the total SID required.
3. Measure from the focal spot the number of inches determined in Step 1 to the table
top (refer to Illustration 2-29).
4. Adjust the tube collar so that the desired distance is obtained from focal spot to table
top.
ILLUSTRATION 2-29
SETTING SID
(2 required)
2-34
Service Manual
3-1-2-3 Interconnecting Cable Wiring

1. Position the junction box in a predetermined area (preferably at some mid-point
between the control and the tube stand).
2. Secure the junction box to the wall using appropriate hardware and uncoil all
auxiliary cables.
3. Route all auxiliary cables to the junction box and wire according to Illustration 2-30.
Note: Route auxiliary cables through wire mold or equivalent wherever possible.
3-1-2-4 Tilt Switch Operation (Factory Adjusted)

1. Beam Left: Jump A3 to A1 and A2 to A4 (refer to Logic Board Layout in Chapter 8).
2. Beam Right: Jump A3 to A2 and A4 to A1 (refer to Logic Board Layout in Chapter
8).
Note: This is accomplished by rotating mating jumper body.
ILLUSTRATION 2-30
JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM
2-35
Service Manual
Note: Reference the interconnect maps located in Chapter 8, Schematics, Section 1.
ILLUSTRATION 2-31
SID SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM
2-36
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-32
BUCKY CIRCUIT WIRING DIAGRAM
Slide
Arm
Cut 1K 1K
Tray In 2W 2W
SW. Tray Circuit
Plug Receptacle
Bucky Circuit Table,

Wall, or S&S
Cassette Holder
Terminal
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Strip
Add 3
Red Cross
Jump
Grn Long
White
Black
From Dial-X
Junction Box
2-37
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-33
BUCKY INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
2-38
Service Manual
TABLE 2-2
COLLIMATOR WIRING COLOR CODES
Description Wire Color Destination
Timer Board
White
Pin #1 Lamp Socket Auto-Tech Motor Drive
Yellow
Pin #2 Orange Auto-Tech Motor Drive
24 VAC Common to splice with White of Power Cable and
Pin #3 Red
Brown of Lamp Socket
Pin #4 Black Button Switch
Pin #5 Black 24 VAC Power Cable
Pin #6 N/C
Pins #8 and #9 N/C
Lamp Socket
To splice with White of Power Cable and Red to Pin #3 of Timer
Brown
Board
White Pin #1 of Timer Board
Mirror/Filter Switch
Common Black Pin D of Tilt Switch
Normally Closed Black Pin S Edge Connector
2-39
Service Manual
TABLE 2-2 continued

COLLIMATOR WIRING COLOR CODES
Panel Lamps
Common (All) Black Pin H Edge Connector
Ready Green/Black Pin 19 Edge Connector
Ready Green Pin 18 Edge Connector
Manual Orange Pin v Edge Connector
Exposure Hold Red Pin 16 Edge Connector
Tilt Switch: D70A
Pin A (Left) Blue Pin E Edge Connector
Pin B (Right) Green Pin 5 Edge Connector
Pin C (Table) Violet Pin 11 Edge Connector
Yellow Pin 12 Edge Connector
Pin D (Common)
Black Common of mirror/filter switch
Shutter Pots
Cross Shutter #1 Black/White Pin K of Edge Connector
Cross Shutter #2 Blue/Black Pin J of Edge Connector
Cross Shutter #3 Red/White Pin 10 of Edge Connector
Long Shutter #1 Black/White Pin K of Edge Connector
Long Shutter #2 Orange/Black Pin 8 of Edge Connector
Long Shutter #3 Red/White Pin 10 of Edge Connector
Motors
Common (White) White Pin 6 of Edge Connector
Open Cross (Green) Blue Pin 22 of Edge Connector
Close Cross (Red) Green/White Pin Z of Edge Connector
Open Long (Red) White/Black Pin 21 of Edge Connector
Close Long (Green) Red/Black Pin Y of Edge Connector
2-40
Service Manual
TABLE 2-3
COLLIMATOR WIRING COLOR CODES: REMOTE LOGIC AND DUAL WALL OPTION (DWO)
Connector/Pi
Description Wire Color n Cable Destination
Panel Lamps
Common (All) Black P2/1 DR-2 Pin H Edge Connector
Ready Green/Black P2/9 DR-2 Pin 19 Edge Connector
Ready Green P2/4 DR-2 Pin 18 Edge Connector
Manual Orange P2/3 DR-2 Pin V Edge Connector
Exposure Hold Red P2/2 DR-2 Pin 16 Edge Connector
Tilt Switch: D70A for Blue P1/5 DR-1 DWO Relay
DWO (right) Orange P1/6 DR-1 Pin H Edge Connector
Tilt Switch D70A with
remote logic (right/left)
Pin A (Left) Red P1/1 DR-1 Pin E Edge Connector
Pin B (Right) Green P1/4 DR-1 Pin 5 Edge Connector
Pin C (Table) White P1/3 DR-1 Pin 1 Edge Connector
Blue/White P2/15 DR-2 Pin 12 Edge Connector
Pin D (Common)
Black / Common of mirror/filter switch
Mirror/Filter Switch Black P1/2 DR-1 Pin NC of mirror/filter switch
Shutter Pots
Cross Shutter #1 Black/White P2/12 DR-2 Pin K of Edge Connector
Cross Shutter #2 Blue/Black P2/10 DR-2 Pin J of Edge Connector
Cross Shutter #3 Red/White P2/13 DR-2 Pin 10 of Edge Connector
Long Shutter #1 Black/White P2/12 DR-2 Pin K of Edge Connector
Long Shutter #2 Orange/Black P2/8 DR-2 Pin 8 of Edge Connector
Long Shutter #3 Red/White P2/13 DR-2 Pin 10 of Edge Connector
Motors
Common (White) White P2/6 DR-2 Pin 6 of Edge Connector
Open Cross (Green) Blue P2/5 DR-2 Pin 22 of Edge Connector
Close Cross (Red) Green/White P2/14 DR-2 Pin Z of Edge Connector
Open Long (Red) White/Black P2/11 DR-2 Pin 21 of Edge Connector
Close Long (Green) Red/Black P2/7 DR-2 Pin Y of Edge Connector
24 VAC Black P3/1 DR-1 Fuse F1/remote logic box
24 VAC Brown/Red P3/2 DR-1 Remote logic box
GND Black P3/2 DR-1 GND - Remote logic box
2-41
Service Manual
TABLE 2-4
SID WIRING COLOR CODES
40" Vertical SID

Common 1 Black Junction Box TB - 1/4
Normally Open 1 REd Junction Box TB - 1/3
Common 2 Black Tube stand Collar
Normally Open 2 Red Tube stand Collar
40" Horizontal SID
Normally Open 1 Red Junction Box TB - 1/7
Normally Open 2 Red Tube stand Collar
72" Horizontal SID
Normally Open 1 Green Junction Box TB - 1/5
Normally Open 2 Green Tube stand Collar
2-42
Service Manual
TABLE 2-5
BUCKY WIRING COLOR CODES
Bucky (Wall)
Terminal #1 White Jump to Terminal #4
Terminal #4 White Junction Box TB - 1/10
Terminal #5 (cross) Red Junction Box TB - 1/8
Terminal #6 White Jump to Terminal #2, #3
Terminal #7 Black Junction Box TB - 1/9
Terminal #8 (long) Green Junction Box TB - 1/11
Bucky (Table)
Terminal #4 White Junction Box TB - 1/14
Terminal #5 (cross) Red Junction Box TB - 1/12
Terminal #6 White Jump to Terminal #2, #3
Terminal #7 Black Junction Box TB - 1/13
Terminal #8 (long) Green Junction Box TB - 1/15
2-43
Service Manual
3-2 D50M (Manual Collimator)

3-2-1 Overview
This section provides the procedures for installing the D-50M Series of manual
collimators.
3-2-1-1 Required Tools and Materials
In addition to such standard hand tools as screwdrivers and wrenches, the following tools
and materials are required to perform the installation procedures:
Jeweler screwdriver (for slotted screws)
.050" hex key
3/8" open end wrench
3-2-2 Procedures
The following procedures should be reviewed completely before beginning the actual
installation.
Note: Alteration of any circuit, junction or component or addition of any of the above without
the expressed written consent of Dial-X Instruments will void any applicable warranty of
certification.
3-2-2-1 Collimator Mounting Instructions: Models D-50M

Collimator mounting consists of removing the mounting ring and plate assembly from
the collimator, fastening the ring to the x-ray tube port boss and then attaching the
collimator to the plate. Refer to Illustration 2-35 as you perform the following steps:
1. Remove the mounting ring and plate assembly from the top of the collimator by
removing the four (4) 10-32 x 3/8" cap nuts located in the four corners of the plate.
2. Select the required amount of spacers and mounting hardware from the material
supplied. Use the proper size screw length to insure that the mounting screws engage
at least five threads (1/4") into the x-ray tube port boss.
3. Attach the mounting ring assembly to the x-ray tube. The mounting screws (1/4-20)
should be installed with lock washers provided, through the holes provided in the
mounting ring (and tube support if applicable) into the tube port boss. Make sure you
have placed the required amount of spacers between the mounting ring and the tube
port boss. Tighten the screws securely.
4. Attach collimator to mounting plate assembly A using four (4) 10-32 x 3/8" cap
nuts.
2-44
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-35
COLLIMATOR MOUNTING
X-RAY TUBE
PORT BOSS OPENING

SPACERS
(IF TOSHIBA TUBE,
INSTALL ABOVE FORK)
MOUNTING FORK
(HANDGRIP MOUNTING
PLATE, IF TRUNNION)
SPACERS
(IF EUREKA TUBE,
10-32 CAP NUTS (4X) INSTALL BELOW FORK)
MOUNTING PLATE
ASSEMBLY
LOCKWASHERS
1/4-20 BOLTS
(USE 6 mm x 30 mm
WHEN TOSHIBA OR COLLIMATOR
IAE TUBE IS USED)
COLLIMATOR
(TOP VIEW)
NOTE:
IF SWIVEL COLLIMATOR
MOUNT IS USED WITH
A TRUNNION MOUNTED
TUBE, THE KNURLED
KNOB HANDLE MUST BE
ORIENTED AS SHOWN
ABOVE
003.CDR
ILLUSTRATION 2-34
MOUNTING ADAPTER SPACING REQUIREMENTS
Focal Spot
3" (+1/8", -0")
Mounting Ring
Mounting Top of
Plate Collimator
2-45
Service Manual
3-2-2-2 Setting SID to the Bucky

Determine the location of the focal spot of the tube. Refer to the manufacturer's tube
specifications.
1. Determine the distance from the top of the cassette in the tray to the table top by
measuring.
2. Subtract this measurement from the total SID required.
3. Measure from the focal spot the number of inches determined in Step 1 to the table
top (refer to Illustration 2-36).
4. Adjust the tube collar so that the desired distance is obtained from focal spot to table
top.
ILLUSTRATION 2-36
SETTING SID
(as supplied)
2-46
Service Manual
TABLE 2-6
COLLIMATOR WIRING COLOR CODES: MODELS D-50M, D-50M-MF, AND D-50M-LW
Timer Board
White Lamp Socket
Pin #1
Yellow Auto-Tech Motor Drive*
Pin #2 Orange Auto-Tech Motor Drive*
24 VAC common to splice with White of power cable and
Pin #3 Red
Brown of lamp socket
Pin #5 Black 24 VAC Power Cable
Pin #6 N/C
Pins #8 and #9 N/C
Lamp Socket
To splice with White of power cable and Red to Pin #3 of Timer
Brown
Board
White Pin #1 of Timer Board
*On Model D-50M only
2-47
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-37
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
D-70A_junction.cdr
2-48
Service Manual
SECTION 4
VERTICAL BUCKY
4-1 Bucky Structure Specifications

This section provides specifications and parts information for the Silhouette HF bucky
structure. The information is provided in the following illustrations:
Illustration 2-38 - Bucky Structure Assembly Parts Location Diagram
Illustration 2-39 - Silhouette HF Bucky Structure Dimensional Statistics
ILLUSTRATION 2-38
BUCKY STRUCTURE SPECIFICATIONS
BUCKY STRUCTURE
K
B
C
F A
G H
J D
M
E
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A WALL-MOUNTING L BRACKET
I
B PULLEY WHEEL ASSY/TOP COVER
C PULLEY WHEEL COVER (SMALL)
D TUBESTAND ASSEMBLY
E COLLAR
F BUCKY
G PHENOLIC FRONT
H BUCKY BRACKET
I FLAT BASE MOUNTING PLATE bucky_specs.cdr
J STUD BRACKET
K WALL-MOUNTING BAR (OPTIONAL)
L STOP BRACKET ASSEMBLY
M PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
2-49
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-39
BUCKY STRUCTURE DIMENSIONAL STATISTICS
2-50
Service Manual
4-2 Assembling the Bucky Structure

To assemble the Silhouette HF Bucky Structure, refer to Illustration 2-38 and Illustrations
2-40 through 2-43 in this section.
1. Rest the bottom end of the tube stand assembly on soft support material. Remove the
shipping screw located in the Flat Base Mounting Plate (refer to Illustration 2-40).
2. Carefully raise the tube stand to an upright position with the Pulley Wheel facing
front. The Collar will rise up the tube stand because of the pull of the Counterweight.
ILLUSTRATION 2-40
SHIPPING SCREW LOCATION
3. Remove the Stop Bracket located above the Collar (refer to Illustration 2-41.)
ILLUSTRATION 2-41
STOP BRACKET LOCATION (DURING SHIPPING)
ill2-49.cdr
2-51
Service Manual
4. Attach top mounting "L" Bracket to Pulley Wheel Assembly top cap using 1/4-20 x
3/4 heads and split washers. (See Illustration 2-42).
5. Turn on collimator.
6. Align the collimator cross hair lines to the center of the Phenolic Front.
7. Attach the tube stand assembly to the floor through the Flat Base Mounting Plate
using appropriate hardware.
8. Attach the tube stand assembly to the wall using the optional Wall-Mounting Bar and
Wall-Mounting "L" Bracket.
ILLUSTRATION 2-42
TUBE STAND WALL-MOUNTING BRACKET
9. Move the bucky stand through its entire vertical movement, making sure that the light
beam remains on the center of the Phenolic Front.
10. Insert the film cassette into tray in bucky.
11. Take a projection into the cassette for verification of compliance (refer to D-50M
Collimator calibration in this section).
12. Ground the bucky stand using ground stud on the back of the tube stand.
2-52
Service Manual
13. Position bucky Stop Bracket Assembly (L) such that the lowest point of the bucky or
grid cabinet is at least 3 inches from the tube stand Flat Base Mounting Plate (I).
Tighten the two set screws on the Stop bracket Assembly (refer to Illustration 2-.43)
until snug, then tighten additional 1/4-turn.
ILLUSTRATION 2-43
STOP BRACKET LOCATION (DURING SHIPPING)
2-53
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-44
S.I.D. LABEL POSITIONING WALL STAND
S.I.D. LABEL
PART 1 (TO
BUTT UP
AGAINST PART 2)
P/N 2142282 (SAE) KIT

P/N 2142284 (METRIC) KIT
S.I.D. LABEL
PART 3 (TO
BUTT UP
AGAINST PART 2)
Vscale2.cdr
1. Set FST-10 tube collar position to 150cm mark.

2. Turn on collimator light and psition the center line of the bucky cabinet to the
collimator light field.
3. Affix tubestand S.I.D. label Part 1 so that the 150cm mark lines-up with the bottom
edge of the bucky collar.
4. Affix remaining 2 S.I.D. lables as shown above.
2-54
Service Manual
4-3 Electrical Wiring

Wire the Bucky Stand as shown in the Bucky Stand Wiring Diagram, Illustration 2-45.
ILLUSTRATION 2-45
BUCKY STAND WIRING DIAGRAM
BUCKY STAND BUCKY CABINET
GROUND STUD GROUND STUD
FROM
GENERATOR BLACK RED
GROUND #10AW G #16AW G
YEL/GRN YEL/GRN - +
VERTICAL
LOCKING
POWER CABLE MAGNET
BLACK
24 VDC
1
RED
2
BLACK
3
RED
NORMALLY
CLOSED
CONTACT
wiring.cdr
OPERATOR SW ITCH
(ON BACK OF BUCKY)
4-4 Cleaning
Always disconnect the equipment from the main power supply prior
to any cleaning.
WARNING
The system user is responsible for the basic cleanliness of the equipment. On a regular
basis, the bucky surface should be wiped clean. Painted metal surfaces should be cleaned
using a clean cloth slightly moistened in warm soapy water (use mild soap). Wipe with a
clean wet cloth.
Caution: Never use abrasive polish on this equipment.
2-55
Service Manual
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2-56
Service Manual
SECTION 5
TUBE STAND
5-1 Tools, Equipment and Materials

Level - two feet minimum length
Tape Measure - eight feet minimum length
Standard hand tools
Alcohol - to clean the high-tension cable ends, tubehead and high- tension
transformer sockets
Dow-Corning DC4 vapor-proofing compound, silicon insulating grease or equivalent
- for packing x-ray tubehead and high-tension cable terminals
Special film cassette (11" x 14" cassette with scribed centerline)
Electric drill and drill bits
Lubricant - white lithium grease
Socket wrench set
5-2 Environmental Conditions
There are no special environmental conditions required for the safe operation of the tube
stand. However, it is not designed for use in the presence of explosive or flammable
gases as might be found in operating rooms. Operation or prolonged storage temperatures
below 32 degrees Fahrenheit should be avoided as it will cause the lubricants to become
more resistive to manually- operated motions.
5-3 Room Construction
A conventional radiographic room construction should be used in the area where the tube
stand is to be installed. Consult with your State Health Department or local Building
Codes for specific radiation shielding requirements.
5-4 Power Requirements
The tube stand requires continuous 30 VDC at 1.5 amps for operation. The tube stand is
powered from the generator 30 VDC power supply.
5-5 CDRH Certification
The tube stand is not a CDRH certifiable product. However, it must be compatible and
operate in conjunction with other components in the x-ray system so that the x-ray
system performs in compliance with H.E.W. Performance Standards.
This product has been factory tested to assure its required performance in an x-ray
system. Routine preventive maintenance must be be performed by the user to ensure
proper equipment operation.
5-6 Alignment of the System
Once assembled, a diagnostic x-ray system must be capable of maintaining the alignment
of the center of the x-ray field to the center of the image receptor to within 2% of the
SID. This is achieved by calibration of the beam limiting system and alignment of the
tube stand. The assembler must follow the detailed instructions provided by this manual.
When the tube stand is used with a wall cassette stand or bucky stand, care should be
taken during room planning and pre-installation to allow for the accurate alignment of
these components. Alignment accuracy must be within 2% of the SID used. After the
tube stand tracks are aligned with the table bucky, the tracks cannot be adjusted
transversely. Therefore, transverse alignment of the radiation field to the film in the
2-57
Service Manual
bucky stand must be made by adjusting the extension arm centering detent, adjusting the
position of the bucky on the stand or relocation of the entire stand.
5-7 Installation Precautions
Check that the space location, conduit arrangements and junction boxes are prepared for
the permanent installation of the tube stand. Verify that the location and space allowed is
sufficient for the full range of tube stand/Tube Arm travel without hitting any walls or
structures in the room. Refer to the Equipment Configuration Drawings.
In selecting the best location for the tube stand, note that the Tube Arm in/out adjustment
and the column position to the rear wall are critical. Column rotation in the
counter-clockwise (right- hand) direction could result in the Tube Housing striking the
wall before the 90 degree index position is reached. Install the tube stand before
installing the table.
Caution Do not remove counterweight locking bolt and screw

until instructed to do so.
Caution If the floor condition is unsuitable for a level and secure

installation, corrective action must be taken. Floor
grouting may have to be provided. An Installation kit is
supplied with grout.
5-8 Base Track and Leveling Information
The Base Track should be level both longitudinally and transversely. Shims can be used,
if necessary. However, grout is recommended. Use a bubble level on the front or rear
tracks in which the tube stand Bearings travel in the Base Assembly to determine if level
(refer to Illustration 2-46).
ILLUSTRATION 2-46
LEVELING THE BASE TRACK
5-9 Securing the Base Track

The tube stand base track must be fastened down to the floor, to prevent losing the
alignment of the horizontal travel and x-ray tube angulation functions. Appropriate
fastening devices should be used depending on the installation site.
2-58
Service Manual
5-10 Base and Tube Stand Column Assembly

Mount the Base to the Tube Stand Column and secure with the supplied retaining ring at
the bottom of the Tube Stand Column (refer to Illustration 2-47).
ILLUSTRATION 2-47
BASE AND TUBE STAND COLUMN ASSEMBLY
2-59
Service Manual
5-11 Removal of Counterweight Locking Block

Remove the screw in the Tube Stand Column holding the wooden locking block. Slip the
locking block out of the Tube Stand Column.
5-12 Installation of the Tube Stand in the Base Track
1. Remove the Front and Rear Bearing Assembly Mounting Brackets from the Base
Assembly (refer to Illustration 2-48.)
2. Slide the bearing assemblies into the Base Track.
3. Raise the Base and Tube Stand Column onto the Base Track and install the bearing
assemblies.
Note: When bearing assemblies are removed, extreme care must be taken not to tip over the
Base and Tube Stand Column. The Base and Tube Stand Column should not be left
standing unattended at any time. Re-install bearing assemblies immediately once the
column is raised.
ILLUSTRATION 2-48
INSTALLING THE TUBE STAND IN THE BASE TRACK
2-60
Service Manual
5-13 Installation of the Track Stop Bumpers

The Base Track is equipped with two Track Stop Bumper Rails. Install one Track Stop
Rail at each end of the base track.
5-14 Tube Stand Column Vertical Angle Adjustment
The Tube Stand column vertical angle adjustment is made at the factory. However, it is
important to verify this adjustment. Use a double-bubble level, two feet in length
minimum, placed on the front of the Tube Stand Column. Adjustment can be made by
adjusting two Vertical Angle Adjustment Bearings with eccentric bushings (refer to
Illustration 2-49). The bearing assemblies in the rear of the Base should be loose from the
Base Assembly; re-adjust after the Tube Stand Column vertical angle adjustment is
made.
ILLUSTRATION 2-49
TUBE STAND COLUMN VERTICAL ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
2-61
Service Manual
5-15 Installing Tube Support Bracket (Mounting Fork)

1. Install the Tube Support Bracket onto the Transverse Carriage Assembly using four
(4) 5/16"-18 x 1/2" Socket Head Cap Screws, flat washers and lockwashers (refer to
Illustration 2-50).
ILLUSTRATION 2-50
MOUNTING TUBE SUPPORT BRACKET
TRANSVERSE BOOM TUBE SUPPORT BRACKET

MOUNTING PLATE (MOUNTING FORK)
FLAT WASHER, 5/16"-18 x 1/2"

LOCK WASHER SOCKET HEAD
(4X EACH) CAP SCREWS (4X)
FORK.EPS
2-62
Service Manual
5-16 Installing Trunnion (BTR-3F) Option

1. Install the Trunnion onto the Transverse Carriage Assembly using four (4) 5/16-18 x
1/2 socket head cap screws. Use the center set of four holes for initial installation
(refer to Illustration 2-51). The upper and lower sets of holes are used to help balance
the tube and collimator for certain installations, such as when a heavier collimator is
used.
ILLUSTRATION 2-51
TRANSVERSE BOOM MOUNTING PLATE
TRANSVERSE BOOM
MOUNTING PLATE
TRANSVERSE BOOM MOUNTING PLATE:

MOUNTING HOLE PATTERNS
STANDARD TRUNNION
MOUNTING HOLES
NOTE: ADDITIONAL HOLES ARE

PROVIDED FOR CENTER-OF-GRAVITY
ADJUSTMENTS (FOR EXAMPLE, WHEN
D-70A COLLIMATOR IS USED)
Caution The angulation detent is not mechanically locked;

electrical power must be applied to hold angulation.
During installation of the x-ray tube assembly, the
assembly must be held to prevent free-turning. Mount the
collimator as per the specific instructions supplied by
the collimator manufacturer.
2-63
Service Manual
2. Remove top half of trunnion rings. Place x-ray tube onto lower half and re-mount
upper half.
3. Remove the Collimator Mounting Plate from the collimator. Install the Collimator
Mounting Plate; use the supplied spacers to mount the x-ray tube on the Tube Support
Bracket (refer to Illustration 2-53).
4. Affix Angulation Labels (scale and pointer) as follows:
a. Level tube/collimator horizontally (refer to "Leveling Transverse
Carriage/Collimator" paragraph in this section).
b. Place angulation scales on tube such that a scale can be viewed from either left or
right side of tubestand.
c. Affix pointers on trunnion rings so that arrow points on 0.
ILLUSTRATION 2-52
TUBE/COLLIMATOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENTS
IF COLLIMATOR TENDS TO ROTATE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE,
RE-MOUNT TRUNNION IN UPPER
MOUNTING HOLES ON TRANSVERSE
BOOM MOUNTING PLATE.
TRUNNION
TRANSVERSE BOOM
MOUNTING PLATE
TRUNADJ.EPS
IF COLLIMATOR TENDS TO ROTATE

CLOCKWISE, RE-MOUNT TRUNNION IN
LOWER MOUNTING HOLES ON TRANSVERSE
BOOM MOUNTING PLATE.
2-64
Service Manual
5-17 Installing the X-Ray Tube and Collimator

Install the Tube Support Bracket onto the Transverse Carriage Assembly. Remove the
Collimator Mounting Plate from the collimator and install the Collimator Mounting Plate
with supplied spacers to mount the x-ray tube on the Tube Support Bracket (refer to
Illustration 2-53.) Install the x-ray tube.
Caution: The angulation lock is not a mechanical lock; electrical

power must be applied to hold angulation. During
installation of the x-ray tube assembly, the assembly
must be held to prevent free-turning. Mount the
collimator as per the specific instructions supplied by
the collimator manufacturer.
ILLUSTRATION 2-53
X-RAY TUBE COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY
2-65
Service Manual
5-18 Hand Grip Assembly Installation

Mount the Hand Grip Assembly in front of the x-ray tube using four (4) 1/4-20 hex head
bolts (refer to Illustration 2-54.)
ILLUSTRATION 2-54
CONTROL HAND GRIP ASSEMBLY
2-66
Service Manual
5-19 Leveling Collimator

1. Verify that Transverse Carriage Assembly is level as shown in Illustration 2-55. If
Transverse Boom is not level (1.0) with respect to the Housing, verify that the base
track and tube stand are level. If base track and tube stand are level, replace
Transverse Carriage Assembly (refer to Chapter 5, Service Procedures).
ILLUSTRATION 2-55
CHECKING TRANSVERSE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY
LEVEL (CHECK TWO PLACES)
TRANSVERSE CARRIAGE
ASSEMBLY HOUSING
TRANSVERSE
BOOM
LEVEL.EPS
2-67
Service Manual
2. Place a level on top or bottom of the collimator (from front to back). If not level,
proceed as follows:
a. Loosen four (4) 5/16-18 x 1/2 socket head cap screws securing tube fork (or
trunnion) to Transverse Boom Mounting Plate.
b. Adjust set screws as required to level collimator (refer to Illustration 2-56).
c. Re-tighten four (4) 5/16-18 x 1/2 socket head cap screws.
ILLUSTRATION 2-56
ADJUSTING COLLIMATOR/TUBE PITCH
PITCH ADJUSTMENT
SET SCREWS (4 PLACES)
PITCH.EPS
2-68
Service Manual
5-20 Vertical Counterweight Balancing Instructions

Verify that the vertical counterweight is balanced properly, so that it provides a smooth
up and down motion. If additional weights are necessary, add trim weights at the rear side
of the Tube Stand Column and at the top of the Vertical Carriage Assembly (refer to
Illustration 2-57).
Note: Be careful not to drop trim weights when adding through top of tube stand.
ILLUSTRATION 2-57
COUNTERWEIGHT ACCESS LOCATIONS
(REAR VIEW OF TUBESTAND)
TRIM WEIGHT
OPENING
(ACCESS PANEL REMOVED)
TRIMWT.EPS
2-69
Service Manual
5-21 Location of the Locks and Adjustment

Electromagnet locks are provided in this system for longitudinal, transverse, vertical, and
angulations. Space between locks and contacting part of the chassis should be
approximately 20/1000" (refer to Illustrations 2-58, 2-59, and 2-60).
ILLUSTRATION 2-58
LOCKS AND ADJUSTMENT
ILLUSTRATION 2-59
ROTATIONAL AND VERTICAL LOCK
VERTICAL LOCK
MAGNETIC
ANGULATION
LOCKS
2-70
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 2-60
CENTER DETENT
2-71
Service Manual
5-22 Installation of the Vertical and Horizontal SID Switches

This system provides a 40" Vertical SID Switch Assembly and 40" and 72" Horizontal
SID Switch Assemblies.
5-22-1 Vertical SID Switch Assembly Installation
The Vertical SID Switch Assembly is mounted on the anode side of the Vertical Carriage
Assembly. Two holes of the Vertical Carriage Assembly are provided along with 6-32
screws, nuts and flat washers. The Vertical SID Switch actuating arm faces towards the
Tube Stand Column. Bring the Vertical Carriage Assembly down to the desired 40" SID
mark on the Tube Stand Column outer lip. Center the Vertical SID Switch trip plate
supplied on the Tube Stand lip, and align with the 40" SID mark. Mark the location for
the Vertical SID Switch actuator. Clean marked area with alcohol and secure actuator in
marked location using double-sided tape. Dress Vertical SID Switch wires into drape.
There are two switches in the assembly, one switch for 40" SID indication light in the
hand grip assembly and one switch for the 40" SID function for collimator logic.
Note: If table is to be installed, do not anchor down table at this time.
2-72
Service Manual
5-22-2 Horizontal SID Switch Assembly Installation

Adjust the Horizontal SID Switches as follows (refer to Illustration -61):
1. Remove four (4) screws securing right panel to Base and remove panel.
2. Position the Tube Stand at 40" and 72" SID and mark each position on Base Track.
3. Clean marked area with alcohol and secure actuator in marked location using
double-sided tape. Adjust switch height to ensure activation at 40" and 72".
4. Install all covers and caps on the Base.
ILLUSTRATION 2-61
HORIZONTAL SID SWITCH ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
2-73
Service Manual
5-23 Installation of the High-Voltage Cables and the System Cabling

Install the Anode and Cathode terminals to the x-ray tube housing. Allow sufficient cable
drape (refer to Illustration 2-62) in order to angulate the x-ray tube 90 degrees in either
direction, then fasten the cables into the cable clamp on the Vertical Carriage Assembly
in the Tube Stand Column with the cable from the Hand Grip Assembly, Transverse Lock
Assembly, Angulation Lock Assembly and Vertical SID Assembly.
Route the cables in a large loop to the middle of the Tube Stand Column and use supplied
cable clamp to fasten the cables.
From the middle of the Tube Stand column, drape the cables with the 30 VDC power
supply cable to the High Tension Transformer.
Note 1: Terminal strips TB1and TB2 are located on the rear of the Tube Stand Column.
Note 2: Refer to Installation and Service Training video tape course for instructions on installing
the cable concealment.
ILLUSTRATION 2-62
TUBE ARM
2-74
Service Manual
5-24 Vertical Distance Scales

A Vertical Distance Scale should be mounted in the middle of the front Tube Stand
Column. The Vertical Distance Scale, calibrated in both centimeters (metric system) and
inches (SAE system), indicates the focal spot-to-bucky and -table top distance (refer to
Illustration 2-63).
Note: Bucky and table SID measurements and markings are made separately and independently
of each other.
5-24-1 Bucky SID

1. Set tube collar position for 40" (100 cm) bucky SID.
2. Affix label so that the 40" (100 cm) mark lines up with the bucky indicator line.
5-24-2 Table SID
1. Set tube collar position for 40" (100 cm) table SID.
2. Affix label so that the 40" (100 cm) mark lines up with the table indicator line.
ILLUSTRATION 2-63
VERTICAL DISTANCE SCALE
2-75
Service Manual
5-25 Column Rotation Adjustment

Rotate the column to feel the mechanical indexing. The tension of indexing is adjusted
by the two 1/4-20 socket head screws, one on each side of the Tube Stand Column near
the base (refer to Illustration 2-64).
ILLUSTRATION 2-64
COLUMN ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
2-76
Service Manual
5-26 Tube Stand Wiring

1. For wiring instructions, refer to system interconnect diagram.
2. Affix latching duct to rear side of column as shown in Illustration 2-65 . Insert cables
running from tubestand base to terminal boards TB1 and TB2 into latching duct.
Allow sufficient cable drape for full column rotation.
ILLUSTRATION 2-65
VERTICAL DISTANCE SCALE
TERMINAL BOARDS
TB1 AND TB2 COVER
LATCHING DUCT
STRIP.EPS
5-27 Collimator Light Field Versus the Actual X-Ray Field

Using any size film with cassette, set the proper technique in the x-ray generator. Make
an exposure and develop the film to verify that actual x-ray field versus collimator light
field.
Note: For this test, it is very important to use the collimator light for aligning the table and
vertical bucky stand.
Use collimator light horizontal cross light for aligning the table and rotating the x-ray
tube to check the pitch adjustment as required. Verify vertical movement and alignment
by using collimator light. The collimator light can be used to align vertical bucky stand
or cassette holder.
2-77
Service Manual
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
2-78
Service Manual
CHAPTER 3 CALIBRATION
SECTION 1
TABLE
No table calibration required.
SECTION 2
GENERATOR
Note: Stored energy systems must be fully charged before performing the calibration
procedures that follow. To charge stored energy cells, disable the automatic shut-off
feature (refer to System Configuration Mode paragraph in this chapter for instructions)
and leave generator on for approximately 24 hours.
2-1 Overview
The Silhouette HF generator you have received has been factory configured and
calibrated. It is necessary, however, to perform the following electrical checks (to
validate system compliance) and to re-calibrate the system for the line voltage present at
the installation site.
As you proceed to calibrate the Silhouette HF generator, please note the following:
Printed circuit board locations are indicated in Illustrations 3-1 through 3-3d and
should be referenced as required.
Access to the Utility Menu required for calibration procedures is via key switch from
either the Auto-Tech or Manual Mode Menu (these are also referred to as the
operating mode menus).
2-1-1 Tools and Materials
Alignment tool, cassettes and film
Digital voltmeter Fluke Model 87 or equivalent
Keithly 35080A KVP Divider
mAs meter-Fluke 8000A, Philips PM 2618, or Keithley 35035 with 20 mAs upgrade.
Note: These are the only mAs meters approved for use.
Oscilloscope 50 MHZ storage Tek 2210 or equivalent

Radiation measurement tool. Keithley 35050A or MDH Dosimeter or equivalent.
Sensitometer X-Rite Model 303 or equivalent
Densitometer X-Rite Model 301 or equivalent
Plexiglass kit (min 10")
2-2 Reference Voltage Calibration P/N 208116 (A3)
Connect a DVM across TP1 of the microprocessor (A3) and ground. While monitoring
the DVM, adjust R17 to -10.2V + 10mV.
2-3 Rotor Calibration
This calibration is factory pre-set. It should not have to be adjusted unless a rotor error
appears on the display. If adjustment is needed, R32 and R33 on the interface board (A1)
should be turned counterclockwise. Press PREP to cycle the rotor. Do not turn R32 or R33
while PREP is pressed.
3-1
Service Manual
2-4 Liquid Crystal Display

To adjust the intensity of the liquid crystal display (LCD), rotate R10 either clockwise or
counterclockwise on the Front Panel Display Board, 208113.
2-5 Source Charger Calibration P/N 208088 (A11 and A14) (For Se Systems Only)
Note: A fully charged system is required to set R5, R21 and R34 to the proper settings. A14 is
not used in the Silhouette HF SE version.
3-2
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-1
PCB LOCATION (NON-CE MARK SYSTEMS, BELOW S/N 34000)
3-3
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-2
CAPACITOR/BRIDGE LAYOUT (NON-CE MARK SYSTEMS, BELOW S/N 34000)
ILLUSTRATION 3-3
DRIVER LAYOUT (NON-CE MARK SYSTEMS, BELOW S/N 34000)
DRIVER.EPS
* NOT ON STORED ENERGY OR 3-PHASE SYSTEMS
3-4
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-3a
PCB LOCATION (CE MARK SYSTEMS, S/N 34000 AND UP)
DRIVER A21
DRIVER A19
INTERFACE BOARD A1
MICROPROCESSOR
BOARD A3
KVP CONTROL
BOARDS A4, A8
CAPACITORS OR STORED
ENERGY MODULES:
SEE CAPACITOR/BRIDGE LAYOUT
OR STORED ENERGY LAYOUT DIAGRAMS
FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
LINE MONITOR/ AEC CONTROL

SOURCE CHARGER BOARD A10 * REGULATED
BOARDS A11, A14 *
POWER SUPPLY
BOARD A2
FILAMENT RESISTOR
BOARD A6 DISTRIBUTION BOARD
A7
SERIAL INTERFACE
BOARD A15
TOMO INTERFACE
BOARD A29 *
FILAMENT CONTROL
REG. BOARD A5
INTERCONNECT PANEL
POWER SHUTOFF A13
BOARD A9
NOTE: "*" OPTIONAL PCB: SYSTEM DEPENDENT
PCB.CDR
3-4a
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-3b
CAPACITOR/BRIDGE LAYOUT (CE MARK SYSTEMS, S/N 34000 AND UP)
ILLUSTRATION 3-3c
DRIVER LAYOUT (CE MARK SYSTEMS, S/N 34000 AND UP)
DRIVER A21 DRIVER A19
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
A7
DRIVER.EPS
3-4b
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-3d
HIGH SPEED STARTER OPTION LAYOUT
HIGH SPEED STARTER
HFQHSS.EPS
3-5
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-4
STORED ENERGY MODULE LAYOUT
SES.EPS
2-5-1 Silhouette HF (SE) Systems
Note: The following procedure applies only to non-CE mark (below S/N 34000) Silhouette HF
(SE) Systems. Refer to paragraph 2-5-1a for CE mark (S/N 34000 and up) Silhouette HF
(SE) Systems.
1. Shut CB1 off and remove fuses F12 through F15. Connect the DVM to GND and
A11-TP3. Adjust R5 to read between +210 and +214 VDC. D6 should be flashing.
2. Turn CB1 on. Connect the DVM to GND and A11-TP3. Adjust R5 to read between
+210 and +214 VDC. D6 should be flashing.
3. Connect the DVM to GND and A11-TP4. Adjust R21 to read between -210 and -214
VDC. D9 should now be flashing.
4. Connect the DVM to GND and A14-TP3. Adjust R5 to read between +210 and +214
VDC. D6 should be flashing.
6. Turn the main circuit breaker off. Wait until D6 and D9 LEDs extinguish and
disconnect A11 J1. Replace all fuses into the main fuse panel. Turn the main circuit
breaker back on.
7. Connect the DVM to GND and A14-TP2. Adjust A14-R34 to read +4.8 volts. Turn
the main circuit breaker off. Wait until A14 D6 and D9 LEDs extinguish, replace A11
J1. Turn the main circuit breaker back on.
8. Turn the key switch on the OCP and press CALIB. Note the displayed SES voltage.
9. Connect positive and negative leads of the DVM to A11 TP-3 and TP-4, respectively.
Verify that the measured voltage is 422 2 VDC.
10. If the actual voltage measured on the DVM is equal to or within 2 volts of the SES
voltage displayed on the OCP, turn the key switch on the OCP to return to normal
operating mode. If not, adjust A11-R34 until the voltage on the OCP is within 2
volts of the measured voltage on the DVM.
3-5a
Service Manual
2-5-1a Silhouette HF (SE) Systems

1. Shut CB1 off and remove fuses F12 through F15. Connect the DVM to GND and
A11-TP3. Adjust R5 to read between +204 and +206 VDC. D6 should be flashing.
2. Turn CB1 on. Connect the DVM to GND and A11-TP3. Adjust R5 to read between
+204 and +206 VDC. D6 should be flashing.
4. Connect the DVM to GND and A14-TP3. Adjust R5 to read between +204 and +206
VDC. D6 should be flashing.
6. Turn the main circuit breaker off. Wait until D6 and D9 LEDs extinguish and
disconnect A11 J1. Replace all fuses into the main fuse panel. Turn the main circuit
breaker back on.
7. Connect the DVM to GND and A14-TP2. Adjust A14-R34 to read +4.8 volts. Turn
the main circuit breaker off. Wait until A14 D6 and D9 LEDs extinguish, replace A11
J1. Turn the main circuit breaker back on.
8. Turn the key switch on the OCP and press CALIB. Note the displayed SES voltage.
9. Connect positive and negative leads of the DVM to A11 TP-3 and TP-4, respectively.
Verify that the measured voltage is 410 2 VDC.
10. If the actual voltage measured on the DVM is equal to or within 2 volts of the SES
voltage displayed on the OCP, turn the key switch on the OCP to return to normal
operating mode. If not, adjust A11-R34 until the voltage on the OCP is within 2
volts of the measured voltage on the DVM.
3-6
Service Manual
2-6 Line Voltage Monitor Calibration P/N 208099 (A11) (Not Applicable For SE Systems)
1. Access D. C. Reference Mode: Turn the key switch and then select CALIB from the
Utility Menu. Note the value displayed on screen.
2. Connect DVM across C9 (or any of the 2400 mfd capacitors in the bottom of the
unit). Note voltage. Voltage should be between 350 and 410 VDC for single phase
units and between 375 and 425 VDC for three-phase units.
3. If necessary, adjust A11R26 until the value on screen is the same voltage as measured
on the DVM.
4. Turn the key switch to return to normal operating mode.
2-7 Regulated Power Supply Calibration P/N 208084 (A2)

2-7-1 +/- 15 VDC Supply
1. Connect a voltmeter between +15V TP and GND. Observed voltage should be +15 +
0.2 VDC.
2. If observed voltage is within specification, continue with step 3. If not, adjust the
voltage as follows:
a. Observed voltage low - Adjust R7 clockwise until voltage is within specification.
b. Observed voltage high - Adjust R7 counter-clockwise until voltage is within
specification.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the -15V TP and GND. Observed voltage should be
between - 14.4 and -15.6 VDC.
2-7-2 Filament Voltage Supply
1. Connect the voltmeter between TP1 and GND. Observed voltage should be: 50 VDC
+ 0.1.
Note: For SE units, voltage should be: 36.0 + 0.1
2. If observed voltage is within specification, regulated power supply calibration

procedures are complete. If not, adjust the voltage as follows:
a. Observed voltage low - Adjust R23 on the (A2) board clockwise until the proper
voltage is reached.
b. Observed voltage high - Press PREP button on the front panel to discharge C4,
then adjust R23 counter-clockwise. Continue until voltage is lower than desired
and turn R23 clockwise to the proper voltage.
2-8 KVP Control Board P/N 208089 (A4 and A8)
Do not adjust voltages on this board during routine installation
electrical checks. Calibration is required only upon board or High
WARNING Voltage Tank replacement. In these cases, the kVp Board must be
calibrated to balance the High Voltage Tanks according to the kVp
Calibration Procedures on this page and on page 3-12.
1. Locate the A4 board and connect a voltmeter between TP1 and GND.
2. Adjust R2 for -0.80 + 0.005 VDC.
3. Connect a jumper between TP3 and GND. Remove voltmeter from TP1 and
reconnect to TP2.
4. Adjust R5 for -0.75 VDC + 0.005 at TP2.
5. Remove jumper and voltmeter.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the A8 KVP Control board.
3-6a
Service Manual
2-9 Filament Control Regulator Board P/N 208163 (A5)

No adjustments are to be made on this board. All adjustments have been made at the
factory. If any service to this board is required, notify the factory.
2-10 System Configuration Mode
Operating parameters are pre-configured at the factory for optimum operating efficiency.
It is, therefore, usually not necessary to enter configuration mode. However, should it be
required to either view or configure the system's operating parameters - AEC/SES
settings, language selection, Back-Up mAs, and maximum kV for each mA station,
proceed as follows:
1. Set the main power switch to OFF. Remove the front panel and pull microprocessor
door down to access the microprocessor board.
2. Locate TP3 on the microprocessor board (A3) and place a jumper wire from TP3 to
ground. Refer to Illustration 3-5, Microprocessor Board, TP3, below.
ILLUSTRATION 3-5
MICROPROCESSOR BOARD, TP3
MICROTP3.CDR
3. Set the main power switch to ON. Turn the key switch to access the Utility Menu as
shown:
ILLUSTRATION 3-6
UTILITY MENU
UTILITY
EDIT
COPY
CALIB MASTER
COPY
TEST EEPROM
THK REF PRINT80
PREV
NOT EXP. NO. 347

APPLICABLE
EXPOSURE COUNTER
3-7
Service Manual
4. Press CALIB to begin the configuration process. The following menu is displayed:
ILLUSTRATION 3-7
AEC/SES CONFIGURATION MENU
N E X T C O N F I G U R A T I O N
P R E V
S H U TO F F ?
N O
A E C ? M E T R I C ?
Y E S YS HEU TSO F F ?
YES
M E1 T R I C ?
P YH
ESA S E ?
S E S ? 1
PHASE ?
5. Current settings are displayed:

a. If the system is equipped with optional AEC, YES should be displayed. If the
system does not have AEC, NO should be displayed. Press AEC until the
appropriate setting is displayed.
b. S.E.S. and the current setting should also be displayed. If the system is configured
as a stored energy (SE), YES should be displayed. If it is not an SE system,
NO should be displayed. Press S.E.S. until the appropriate setting is
displayed.
c. To allow the system to automatically shut-off after sixty minutes of inactivity, set
SHUT OFF to YES. To disable automatic shut-off, set to NO.
d. If SIDs are required in metric, select YES. SIDs will now display in metric
values where applicable.
e. If the system is configured as a three-phase unit, select 3. If the system is
configured as a single-phase unit, select 1. Press NEXT.
6. The current language configuration is the shaded field, as shown in Illustration 3-8.
To change the language, proceed as follows:
ILLUSTRATION 3-8
LANGUAGE MENU
C O N F I G U RATI O N
NE XT PORTUG.
ENGLISH ITALIAN
FRENCH
S PAN I S H
GERMAN
a. Turn the power on and access the Utility Menu by turning the key switch. Press
CALIB.
3-8
Service Manual
b. In the Configuration Menu, press the NEXT function key to display the Language
Menu.
c. Press the function key corresponding with the desired language. A PLEASE
WAIT message is displayed while the system re-configures with the new
language.
7. TUBE 1 and the selected back-up MAS is displayed as shown in Illustration 3-10.
MAS range is selectable in increments of 10 from 0 to 600. To increase or decrease
the MAS value, use the function key for the corresponding on screen up/down
arrows. Press NEXT when the required value is displayed. If it is a two-tube unit, you
will then select the back-up MAS value for Tube 2. When the desired value is
displayed, press NEXT.
ILLUSTRATION 3-9
MAS CONFIGURATION MENU
NE XT
540
PREV
^
B A C K - U P M A S T U B E: 1
6 0 0
The lowest MA station and maximum KVP for that station is displayed as shown in
Illustration 3-10. Use the on screen up/down arrows to increase or decrease the KVP
value. KVP range is selectable in increments of 1. When the desired KVP value for
the selected MA station is displayed, press NEXT. The display advances to the next
MA station. Repeat until maximum KVP values for all MA stations have been
selected for both Tube 1 and Tube 2, if applicable. This process is used for derating
the maximum output power, as required. (Refer to Table 3-1 for maximum kVp
values by model number.)
ILLUSTRATION 3-10
MA STATION KVP CONFIGURATION MENU
NE XT
PREV
^
MAX.
M A KVP TUBE:1
25S 125
^
3-9
Service Manual
TABLE 3-1
MAXIMUM KVP VALUES BY MODEL NUMBER
Maximum kVp
25-150 mA Small 200 mA Large 300 mA Large 400 mA Large 500 mA 600 mA
Model No.
Large Large
Single Phase 125 125 125 90 70 60
25-150 mA Small 100 mA Large 200 mA Large 250 mA Large 300 mA Large
Stored Energy 125 125 125 125 125
25-150 mA Small 200 mA Large 300 mA Large 400 mA Large 500 mA 600 mA
Large Large
Three Phase 125 125 125 100 80 70
(40 kW
transformer)
Three Phase 125 125 125 125 100 80
(50 kW
transformer)
8. When the last MA station has been set and NEXT is pressed, the Facility Designation
Menu is displayed.
ILLUSTRATION 3-11
FACILITY DESIGNATION MENU
ST. V I N C E NTS H O S PITAL
This screen allows you to enter the name of the facility with up to 20 alphanumeric
characters. Since this name will appear on the printer label, be sure to center the text
when entering the characters.
Use the upper right and left Function keys to position the cursor and the Field Edit
keys to select the desired character. Please note that blank spaces, the first selectable
character before the letter "A," are displayed as a blank in the appropriate space.
When editing is complete, press ENTER to accept the selection and advance to the
Reset Exposure Counter Menu.
9. When the facility name has been entered and NEXT is pressed, the Reset Exposure
Counter Menu is displayed. Press NO to keep the current exposure number or YES to
reset to 0.
3-10
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-12
EXPOSURE COUNTER MENU
NE XT
PREV
RESET EXPOS. COUNTER

YES
NO
Note: If you reset the Exposure Counter, the Error Log is also cleared.
10. After a selection is made, the KVP/MA Calibration Menu appears. The screen
displays an S.E.S. voltage or DC REF. level, depending upon the system version. An
S.E.S. voltage level of approximately 410 or a DC REF. number of approximately
380 (for single phase units) or 400 (for three-phase units) is displayed. Setting the
system's operating parameters have been completed. To exit configuration mode, set
the main power switch to OFF and remove the jumper wire from TP3 and ground.
ILLUSTRATION 3-13
CALIBRATION SELECT/DC REF STATUS MENUS
CALI B RATI O N
CAL KVP
CAL AEC
CAL MA
D C R E F. 3 50 - 410 VDC
380
380 - 420 VDC

400
3-11
Service Manual
2-11 System Calibration Mode

2-11-1 Balance of H.V. Tanks and KVP Boards
To calibrate KVP, proceed as follows:
The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures.
All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can
WARNING be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered
to.
1. For non-invasive kVp measurements, proceed as follows:
Caution Before calibrating unit, perform warm-up procedures

recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up
procedures described in Section 3, System Operation.
To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed
prior to making and removing any electrical connections.
WARNING
a. Disconnect the blue ribbon cable connector from the cathode KVP Control Board
plug A8J1.
b. Position the Keithley 35080 non-invasive kVp meter so that the long axis of the
meter is perpendicular with the x-ray tube axis with the filter pack side of the
meter facing up. The recommended distance between the tube head and the meter
is 22 inches (55.88 cm).
c. Take an exposure at 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 mAs. The kVp meter will read near
50 kVp. Adjust kVp on panel and repeat exposure until the kVp meter reads 50
+/- 1 kVp.
d. Re-connect the blue ribbon cable connector to the cathode KVP Control Board
plug A8J1 and disconnect the blue ribbon cable connector from the anode KVP
Control Board plug A4J1.
e. Take an exposure without changing the OCP settings. If the kVp meter does not
read near 50 +/- 1 kVp, adjust A8R5 and repeat exposure until the kVp meter
reads 50 +/- 1 kVp.
f. Re-connect the blue ribbon cable connector to the anode KVP Control Board plug
A4J1.
2-11-2 KVP Calibration
1. Access KVP calibration mode as follows:
a. If power to the system has been off, set main power switch to ON. From Manual
Mode, turn the key switch to access the Utility Menu:
3-12
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-14
UTILITY MENU
UTILITY
EDIT
COPY
CALIB MASTER
COPY
TEST EEPROM
THK REF PRINT80
PREV
b. Press CALIB to access the KVP/MA Calibration Select Menu as shown in

Illustration 3-15.
Note: If you have used the CONFIGURATION mode and you have not disconnected the
jumper lead from TP3 to ground, CONFIGURATION mode will be accessed. Continue
to press NEXT until the Calibration Select Menu is displayed.
ILLUSTRATION 3-15
KVP/MA CALIBRATION SELECT MENUS
CALIBRATION
CAL KVP
CAL AEC
CAL MA
D C R E F. 3 50 - 410 VDC
380
380 - 420 VDC

400
c. Press CAL KVP. The KVP Calibration Menu will be displayed:
3-13
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-16
KVP CALIBRATION MENU
CALI B RATI O N CM
NE XT 34
KVP
PREV 5 0
MA
^ 200L
KV MEAS SEC
50 0 .050
^ MAS
10.0
3. Take an exposure and verify that the Keithley 35050A or Scope display indicates a
KVP value identical to the value selected.
4. If measured kVp is correct, continue with Step 5. If not, press KV MEAS up/down
arrow keys until the KV MEAS value corresponds with the actual kVp output
displayed on the scope.
5. Press NEXT. The display will change to calibrate at the next KVP setting with the
same mA and time.
6. Take another exposure and verify that the scope display indicates a KVP value
identical to the value selected.
7. If measured kVp is correct, continue with Step 8. If not, press KV MEAS up/down
arrow keys until the KV MEAS value corresponds with the actual kVp output
displayed on the scope.
8. Press NEXT. The microprocessor will calculate and display the slope and offset and
store these numbers in memory. The LCD will display the KVP/MA Calibration
Select Menu (Illustration 3-15 ).
3-14
Service Manual
2-11-3 MA Calibration
The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures.
All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can
WARNING be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are
followed.
1. To measure mA, use a Fluke 8000A, Philips PM 2618 or Keithley 35035 (with 20
mAs upgrade) mAs meter.
a. Disconnect in the MA lead (purple/white) from the MA terminal on the anode
H.V. tank. Connect the mAs meter in series between the MA lead (purple/white)
on the anode H.V. tank. This may not be as accurate for times less than 50 msec.
b. When calibration is complete, disconnect the mAs meter and reconnect the MA
lead (purple/white) to the anode H.V. tank MA terminal
3. Access MA calibration mode as follows:
a. Press CAL MA directly from the KVP/MA Calibration Select Menu (Illustration
3-15).
b. Or, if power to the system has been off, set main power switch to ON. Turn the
key switch. The Utility Menu (Illustration 3-14) is displayed.
Press CALIB to access the KVP/MA Calibration Select Menu.
Note: If you have used Configuration mode and have not disconnected the jumper lead from
TP3 to ground, Configuration mode will be accessed. Press NEXT until the Calibration
Select Menu is displayed.
Press CAL MA. The MA Calibration Menu is displayed:

ILLUSTRATION 3-17
MA CALIBRATION MENU
CALI B RATI O N CM
NE XT 34
KVP
PREV 50
MA
^ 25S
M A _ CODE SEC
40 0 .050
^ MAS
1.3
Note: kVp and mA have been pre-set; the displayed values are model dependent.
3-15
Service Manual
4. Take an exposure and verify that the mAs meter display indicates an MA value
identical to the value displayed under CALIB (25S as shown in Illustration 3-17).
5. If measured MA is within specification (as indicated in Section 2, General
Information), continue with Step 6. If not, adjust the MA code up or down (by using
the on screen arrow keys) to increase or decrease the mA code reading, respectively.
6. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the mAs meter reading and displayed MA value are within
specification. When the measured and displayed values are within specification, press
NEXT to calibrate at the next kVp step.
If during the mA calibration the mA code requires a value below 0 or above 255 to
obtain the correct mAs, the filament resistance on the A6 (filament resistor) board needs
to be changed. If the mA code needs to be higher than 255, then decrease the resistance
for the appropriate filament by moving the jumper on the A6 board. If the mA code needs
to be lower than 0, then increase the resistance of the filament. Resistors RL1, RL2,
and RL3 are for the Large filament, and resistors RS1, RS2 and RS3 are for the Small
filament. Recalibrate the mA stations after any filament resistance change.
Note: If you decrease the filament resistance, then you MUST decrease the mA code to 50 or
below for all stations previously calibrated. Failure to lower the mA code could result in
damage to the X-Ray tube filament.
7. Repeat the calibration procedure (Steps 3 through 5) for each mA station and using
each kVp step. Each mA station requires calibration at each of the four (4) pre-set
kVp/time steps.
Note: When NEXT is pressed at the end of each mA station setting, the LCD momentarily
displays a "PLEASE WAIT" message. During this time, the microprocessor is entering
the calibration data.
8. After completion of all mA stations, turn the key switch to return to normal operation.
Set main power switch to OFF and re-connect the system.
2-11-4 Maximum Deviation: kVp, Time, mA, mAs
1. Reset the mAs meter and scope.
2. Refer to the data sheet in Chapter 6, Periodic Maintenance, and take exposures at the
required settings.
3. Make sure that the following are within tolerance:
a. mA - + 10% or 5 mA, whichever is greater (calculation from mAs and time on
scope).
b. kVp - + 5%
c. Timing - + 1% + 3 milliseconds. Time is measured at the 90% level of the peak
kV.
d. mAs - + 12% for time greater than or equal to 100 milliseconds and current
greater than or equal to 50 mA; otherwise, accuracy is a product of time and mA
accuracy.
2-11-5 Linearity Test: Refer to HHS procedure
1. Take ten (10) exposures with the exposure factors from the appropriate data sheet in
Chapter 6, Periodic Maintenance. Ensure that the radiation monitor is set for mR, run
a printout and record as Test #1.
2. Take ten (10) exposures with the exposure factors from the appropriate data sheet in
Chapter 6 Ensure that the radiation monitor is set for mR, run a printout and record as
Test #2.
3. Using the data from Tests #1 and #2, refer to the Linearity Data Sheet (Chapter 6) and
calculate the Average Exposure Ratio. It must be equal to or less than 0.1.
3-16
Service Manual
2-11-6 Reproducibility: Refer to HHS procedure

1. Take ten (10) exposures using the settings indicated on the data sheet in Chapter 6,
Periodic Maintenance. Ensure that the radiation monitor is set for mR, run a printout
and record as Test #3.
2. After the tenth exposure, the mR reading must be less than or equal to 0.05.
3. Record on the data sheet.
2-11-7 AEC Calibration (Sets Normal to 1.2 Optical Density Nominal)
Note: These procedures are required only when the AEC option is installed in the system.
For the purposes of the following procedures, we assume that the system is using a table
bucky. If you are using a wall bucky, make the appropriate modifications.
Before proceeding, turn the system off and then on to initialize the settings. Do not press
PREP or EXPOSE.
1. Position ionization chamber under beam at 40-inches from the focal spot.
2. At the OCP make the following selections: AEC mode, AEC ION chamber field 2
(center button), 75 kVp, 200L mA Density N (normal), BUCKY/TABLE.
3. Place the phantom, a plastic container with 8-10 inches of acrylic, in the beam. Open
the collimator shutters to cover the three fields.
4. On the AEC Interface Board, connect negative voltmeter lead to COM TP; connect
positive voltmeter lead to TP3. Adjust R33 for 0.00 + 0.01 volts.
5. With voltmeter connected to TP3, press PREP and hold until the PREP LED comes
on. If measured voltage is not 2.2 VDC, adjust R32 and repeat this step until 2.2 VDC
is attained.
6. Put a loaded cassette under the ionization chamber. Select AEC speed to match
cassette speed. Take an exposure.
7. Measure the optical density. If optical density is less than 1.2, turn the respective
potentiometer for the selected AEC speed (refer to Table 3-2) clockwise to adjust. If
optical density is greater than 1.2, turn the pot counter-clockwise to adjust. Verify
adjustment by repeating the procedure and record the mAs reading on the mAs meter.
TABLE 3-2
POTENTIOMETER TABLE
Pot Film Speed
R54 200
R55 400
R56 600
R15 800
If the optical density has been set at your facility for a film speed of 400 and it is
necessary to adjust for other film/screen combinations, use the mAs value at the 400
film speed to make the following adjustments to pots R54, R56, and R15: for 200
speed, set R54 for twice the mAs; for 600 speed, set R56 for 25% less mAs; and, for
800 speed, set R15 for 50% of the mAs.
Note: Precise calibration should be performed, taking exposures to achieve the optimal density
for each film/screen combination used.
3-17
Service Manual
8. Field Selection Verification: Refer to Illustration 3-18 for field location:

a. Cover Field 1 with the phantom (acrylic), leaving Fields 2 and 3 uncovered.
Select Field 1 and take an exposure. The mAs reading should be close to what
was measured in Step 7.
b. Select Field 2 and then Field 3. In each case, take an exposure and note the mAs.
The mAs reading should be considerably less than in Step 7, thus verifying that
the proper field was selected.
ILLUSTRATION 3-18
FIELD LOCATIONS
1 3
9. Repeat the Field Selection Verification procedure outlined in Step 8 with the phantom
covering Field 3.
Note: Depending on the system configuration, it may be necessary to reverse Fields 1 and 3. In
this case, switch pin 4 (violet) and pin 6 (white) on the AEC Interface Board.
10. Field Balance Check: Make sure that the phantom (acrylic) covers all fields equally.
Turn on each individual field and take an exposure. Verify that the mAs meter reads
the same for each exposure to within +/- 5%. If not, it is necessary to adjust the field
balance. On the AEC Chamber Board (part of the ion chamber), adjust the FIELD
GAIN ADJUSTMENT potentiometers for Fields 1, 2 and 3 to balance the outputs
(i.e., to give the same mAs reading for each field).
11. Chamber Gain Adjustment: If a second chamber is used, it might be necessary to
adjust the chamber gain of the second chamber to match the one adjusted in the
previous step. Place the phantom to cover the center field. Turn on the center field
and select BUCKY WALL or BUCKY TABLE, as appropriate. Take an exposure and
develop the film. Adjust the MASTER GAIN ADJUSTMENT potentiometer to set
overall chamber gain (if your systems AEC Interface Board, 208094, is Rev K or
above, then adjust the chamber gain on this board by adjusting either R58 for Wall or
R57 for Table). Also, repeat the Field Balance Check for the second chamber.
12. Anticipator Gain Adjustment
a. Take an exposure at the lowest mA station with 110 kVp; record optical density.
Take an exposure at the highest mA station with 110 kVp; record optical density.
b. Compare optical density readings for lowest and highest mA exposures. If
difference is less than 10%, AEC is calibrated, if not continue with the next step.
c. If difference is greater than 10%, adjust R12 on the AEC Interface Board and
repeat Step 12a until the difference is less than 10%.
3-18
Service Manual
13. Take an exposure at 200L mA, 75 kVp and verify that the mAs meter measures the
mAs as recorded in step 7. If necessary, adjust the pot (listed in Table 3-2) and repeat
until the mAs is the same as Step 7.
14. Put a loaded cassette under the ionization chamber. Take an exposure at the following
setting: 45 kV, 200L mA ,AEC, Density N (normal), and BUCKY/TABLE. Optical
density should be 1.2 + 0.1. If not, adjust the Density field on the control panel until
the setting is found to achieve the desired density. When this density is achieved,
measure and record the AEC voltage reference (AEC VREF) at A3 U21 pin 1 or at
the input side of R25, AEC VREF TP, on the AEC Interface Board.
Continue to take exposures, in increments of 10 kV, to 122 kV for single-phase input
units and to 125 kV for three phase input units. Measure and record the voltage
required to achieve the desired film density at each kV setting. It may be necessary to
interpolate between density settings, since density changes are in approximately 15%
increments.
15. Now access the AEC Linearization Menu where the AEC reference voltage for each
kV increment is entered. From the Calibration Select Menu, press CAL AEC. The
following menu is displayed:
ILLUSTRATION 3-19
AEC LINEARIZATION
A E C L I N E A R I Z A T I O N
K V P CODE VREF
40 - 49 96 3.84
50 - 59 94 3.76
60 - 69 89 3.56
70 - 79 87 3.48
80 - 89 85 3.40
90 - 99 85 3.40
100 - 109 84 3.36
110 - 119 84 3.36
120 - 129 85 3.40
130 - 139 86 3.44
140 - 149 87 3.48
NOT USED
The VREF (Voltage Reference) value is adjusted only by changing the value in the
CODE column. Use the single up/down arrow keys to modify the CODE value until
the required VREF value is displayed. Use the double up/down arrow key to advance
to the next kVp value. It should not be necessary to change the CODE for 75 kVp
since this was the initial reference (set in Step 7).
After the last CODE has been selected, the edited values will be stored in memory.
The message "PLEASE WAIT" will be displayed momentarily across the bottom of
the display. The system will then return to the Calibration Select Menu.
16. Repeat Step 7 for any other film speeds being used at the facility. Refer to Table 3-2
for the potentiometer and corresponding film speed.
3-19
Service Manual
2-11-8 AEC Linearity Test
Note: Refer to the AEC Linearity Data Sheet in Chapter 6, Periodic Maintenance, for the
following AEC linearity and reproducibility procedures.
1. Take ten (10) exposures in the AEC mode using the exposure factors from the data
sheet for Test 1. Ensure that the radiation monitor is set for mR, run a printout and
record as Test 1.
2. Take ten (10) exposures in the AEC mode using the settings for Test 2. Ensure that
the radiation monitor is set for mR, run a printout and record as Test 2.
3. Using the data from Tests 1 and 2, calculate the average exposure ratio. Results must
be equal to or less than 0.1.
2-11-9 AEC Reproducibility
1. Take ten (10) exposures using the settings for Test 3 on the data sheet.
2. After the tenth exposure, the mR reading must be less than or equal to 0.05. Calculate
the C.O.V. (coefficient of variation) according to NEMA Standards Publication No.
XR 8, Part 2, Page 11, par. D.
3. Record on the data sheet.
2-11-10 Disabling Generator Exposure Audible Tone
To disable the "Exposure On" audible tone within the generator, cut either lead of resistor
R54, which is mounted on the microprocessor board A3, P/N 208116.
3-20
Service Manual
SECTION 3
COLLIMATOR

3-1-1 Overview
This section provides the information and procedures necessary to align and calibrate the
D-70A collimator.
Several of these procedures require the taking of x-rays. All
personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be
WARNING dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to.
3-1-1-1 Tools and Materials
Test stand table
Cassettes and film
RMI Collimator Test Tool Model 161A or equivalent
RMI Beam Alignment Test Tool Model 162A or equivalent
3-1-2 Light Field Edges Identification
Definition: The light field is the area illuminated by the light localizer to define the x-ray
field.
Note: Light intensity is factory set between 17 and 22 footcandles. Intensity should be verified
with a footcandle meter such as the Digaphot Model 3300. Refer to Chapter 5, Service
Procedures, for adjusting lamp intensity procedures.
1. Set Source to Image Distance (SID) at 40" to table top (Illustration 2-29).
2. Set collimator shutters to 10" x 10" dimension on 40" scale of legend with the
collimator perpendicular to the test stand table.
3. Dim the room lights.
4. Turn on the Dial-X light localizer.
5. Place a piece of white paper so that it aligns squarely with the upper right hand edge
of the light field produced by the light localizer striking the table top.
6. Take a second piece of white paper and proceeding from the unilluminated right hand
portion of the table-top, slowly move the paper towards the illuminated area of the
table top.
7. Observe and initially mark the point on the table top paper where the edge
illumination becomes visible on the second sheet.
8. On the right hand side of the light field, measure perpendicular to the edge and make
a second mark 3 mm (.118") toward the center of the illuminated area. This mark
denotes the edge of the field for light calibration purposes.
9. Duplicate this process for the other three sides, measuring in 2 mm (0.079") toward
the center of the illuminated field. These marks now indicate the other three edges of
the light field.
10. Using a straight edge and the marks previously made, carefully draw (parallel and
square) lines to denote the defined edges of the light field.
Note: Right hand side of the field refers to observer's right when facing the collimator front
panel.
3-21
Service Manual
3-1-3 X-ray Field Edges Identification

Definition: As defined by the Performance Standards, the x-ray field is that area of the
x-ray beam from the x-ray focal spot in the plane of the image receptor whose perimeter
is the focus of points at which the exposure rate is one-fourth (25%) of the maximum in
the center of the field.
1. Set Source to Image Distance (SID) at 40" to table top.
2. Set collimator shutters to produce a 10" x 10" dimension field on the 40" scale of the
front panel legend.
3. Ensure that the source assembly is perpendicular to the table top.
4. After making the light field measurements, adjust the x-ray generator exposure
factors to produce a film having a density of 2.0 - 5.0.
5. Check the density using a conventional densitometer or by visual comparison with a
"neutral density" filter having a density of 2.0 - 5.0.
6. Take an exposure on a film with dimensions greater than 10" x 10".
7. Place the developed film on a sheet of white paper. Place a second piece of white
paper on the top of one edge of the film and parallel to the edge of the image.
8. Move this paper slowly from the unexposed border of the image towards the exposed
border of the image.
9. When the increase density is barely perceptible, stop. Mark the point with a fine
stylus.
10. Repeat these procedures for the other three sides.
11. Starting on the cathode side of the projection, locate and mark a point 2 mm (approx.
0.079") towards the center of the image.
12. On the other three sides of the image, measure and mark points 1 mm towards the
center of the image.
13. These marks correspond to the defined edges of the x-ray field.
3-22
Service Manual
3-1-4 Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment

Requirement: DHEW Performance Standards 21 CFR Subchapter "J" require that means
be provided for visually defining the perimeter of the x-ray field. The total misalignment
of the edges of the visually defined field with the respective edges of the x-ray field along
either the length or width of the visually defined field shall not exceed 2% of the distance
from the source to the center of the visually defined field when the surface upon which it
appears is perpendicular to the axis of the x-ray beam. The sum of cross field
misalignment shall not exceed 2% of the source to image distance. The sum of
longitudinal field misalignment shall not exceed 2% of the source to image distance.
If these specifications cannot be met, check the collimator to focal spot distance; also
check for any angulation of the lamp in its socket - it should be perpendicular to the body
of the lamp socket.
1. Before using the test tools, level the table and place the x-ray tube so that the beam
will be perpendicular to the table.
2. Center the tube to the table and use a 40" distance from the focal spot to the table top
(refer to Illustration 3-20).
ILLUSTRATION 3-20
PLACEMENT OF COLLIMATOR AND ALIGNMENT TOOL
X-RAY TUBE
SOURCE-TO-TABLE
DISTANCE: 40"
BEAM ALIGNMENT TOOL
COLLIMATOR TOOL
CASSETTE IN BUCKY TRAY
ALGNTOOL.EPS
3. Place the Beam Alignment Tool in the center of the Collimator Tool and place both
tools in the center of the light field.
4. Adjust the collimator shutters so that the edges of the light field coincide with the
rectangular outline of the Collimator Test Tool.
5. Orient the Collimator Test Tool so that the dot is in the lower left corner (when facing
the collimator). This allows the direction of collimator error to be determined at a
later time.
6. Place an 8" x 10" cassette in the center of the bucky tray.
7. Align the tray to the x-ray tube and expose the cassette at approximately 60 kVp, 2
mAs.
Interpretation of Results: Collimation
If the x-ray field falls within the image of the rectangular frame, alignment is within
specification (refer to Illustration 3-23). If an edge of the x-ray field falls on the first
spot, +/- 1 cm (.394") on either side of the line, it shows that the edges of the x-ray
field and the light field are misaligned by 1%. Similarly, an edge falling on the second
spot, +/- 2 cm (.787"), indicates an error of 2% at 1 m (39.37").
3-23
Service Manual
Alignment at one distance does not guarantee alignment at all other distances. It is
advisable to repeat the test at other commonly used distances. Suggested exposures
and allowable errors at different distances are referenced in Table 3-3.
TABLE 3-3
TEST FILM EXPOSURE FACTORS
Distance Between Maximum

Source and Light Field Exposure Factors for Misalignment Allowed
(T/T) RP Film by BRH (2%)
91.4 cm (36") 60 kVp, 2 mAs 1.8 cm (0.72")

1.22 m (48") 60 kVp, 3 mAs 2.4 cm (0.96")
1.82 m (72") 60 kVp, 8 mAs 3.6 cm (1.44")
ILLUSTRATION 3-21
INTERPRETATION OF GOOD FIELD ALIGNMENT
3-24
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-22
INTERPRETATION OF UNACCEPTABLE FIELD ALIGN
3-25
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-23
INTERPRETATION OF FILM/RECEPTOR ALIGNMENT
1
5
2
3
4
CENTER OF
5
2
X-RAY FIELD
6
1
8 7 6 5 4 2 1 1 2 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 8 7 5 4 3 2 1
6
2
5
CENTER OF FILM
3
5
2
6
INTERPRETATION.CDR
(ENLARGED VIEW)
CENTERING
ERROR
8. If the light field is off in the long field (left to right) direction, the lamp bracket will
require adjustment. Loosen the two lamp bracket screws and shielding your eyes from
the high intensity lamp, use a pair of long nosed pliers to shift the bracket right or left
to bring the light field into alignment. Refer to Illustration 3-24. Re-tighten the lamp
bracket screws.
The lamp operates at very high temperatures. Use appropriate
measures to avoid injury.
WARNING
3-26
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-24
LAMP BRACKET ADJUSTMENT
9. If the light field is off in the cross field (front to back) direction, the mirror will have
to be adjusted. Loosen the allen (.050) set screw in the mirror adjust tube. Using a
small blade common screwdriver, turn the mirror adjust shaft in or out until the light
field is aligned. Re-tighten the .050 allen set screw.
10. Attach the back cover and fasten it into place.
11. To verify the alignment, take another exposure.
3-27
Service Manual
3-1-5 X-ray Field Size vs. Indicated Field Size

Requirement: The maximum error permitted between the light field dimensions and the
x-ray field dimensions is 2% of the SID (source to image) used (i.e.: at 40", maximum
error would be +/- .8").
1. Measure the size of the x-ray field (length and width) and compare the measurement
to that indicated on the lens indicators.
2. The lens indicators should be within +/- 2% of the SID (40"). If it is not, the lens
indicators must be adjusted to achieve the tolerance as stated.
3. To adjust the lens indicators, remove the four screws holding the outer shroud in
place. Remove the shutter adjust knobs.
4. Slide the outer shroud forward and remove it from the inner housing.
5. Remove the bottom cover with the face mask by removing the four screws holding it
in place.
6. Starting with the long field shutters, loosen the two screws on the shutter block
assembly (refer to Illustration 3-25).
3-28
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-25
SHUTTER ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
BOTTOM VIEW
Shutter Adj. Screws
7. Being careful not to disturb the shutters, you should now be able to move the shutter
block assembly without moving the shutters.
8. Set the long field lens indicator to read 8" at 40" SID.
3-29
Service Manual
9. Now tighten the two shutter block assembly screws.

10. Move the long shutter lens indicator to the full open position. This will now expose
the access slot for adjusting the cross shutters.
11. Without disturbing the cross shutters, loosen the two screws on the cross shutter block
assembly.
12. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the cross shutter block.
13. Tighten the two cross shutter block assembly screws.
14. The lens indicators should now be fully adjusted. Replace the bottom housing cover,
face mask and outer shroud.
3-30
Service Manual
3-1-6 X-ray Field and Image Receptor Alignment

Requirement: Means shall be provided to align the center of the x-ray field with respect
to the image receptor to within 2% of the Source to Image Distance (SID).
1. To determine the center of the image receptor, draw diagonal lines from corner to
corner of the x-ray film.
2. Alternately, the film can be folded in half and creased at the center. The two lines will
cross in the center of the image receptor (film).
3. Draw diagonal lines from the corners of the imaged x-ray field.
4. If the centers of the x-ray field and the image receptor are the same, the diagonals of
both sets of lines should cross at the same point. At 40", the error between the image
receptor and the x-ray field should not be greater than 2% of the SID [approximately
2 cm (0.8") for 40" source - table distance]. Refer to Illustration 3-23.
3-1-7 Beam Alignment
Requirement: According to BRH specification, the x-ray beam should be perpendicular
to the image receptor.
If the image receptor is parallel to the table top, the perpendicularity of the x-ray beam
can be checked using the beam alignment test tool with collimator test tool.
1. If the images of the two steel balls overlap (refer to Illustration 3-23), the central ray
is perpendicular within 0.5 .
2. If the image of the top ball (larger shadow) intercepts the first circle (Illustration
3-25), the beam is about 1.5 away from the perpendicular.
3. If the image of the top ball intercepts the second circle, the misalignment is
approximately 3 (Illustration 3-23).
ILLUSTRATION 3-26
INTERPRETATION OF BEAM ALIGNMENT
A B C
ALIGN1.EPS
3-31
Service Manual
3-1-8 Cross Hair to Light Field Center Alignment

1. Remove four screws on the bottom outer shroud and the two shutter adjust knobs.
2. Slide outer shroud forward to remove it from the inner housing.
3. Loosen by one turn each of the four screws adjacent to the face mask on the bottom
of the collimator (Illustration 3-27).
4. Turn on the collimator lamp and align the center of the cross hairs with the center of
the light field, being careful to stay square (aligned) with the light field.
5. Re-tighten the four screws loosened in Step 3.
6. Recheck the alignment.
7. Replace the outer shroud.
8. Reinstall and tighten the four screws that hold the outer shroud in place. Reinstall the
shutter adjust knobs.
ILLUSTRATION 3-27
BOTTOM VIEW OF COLLIMATOR
Face Mask Screws
3-32
Service Manual
3-1-9 Bucky Light Line to Light Field Alignment

Requirement: The center of the image receptor shall align with the center of the x-ray
field to within 2% of the SID.
Since the bucky centering light is integral with longitudinal centering of the image
receptor, it must also be within 2% of the SID used.
1. Activate the collimator light localizer and using a straight edge, check to see that the
bucky light line is centered with the central bar of the cross-field, cross-hair image.
2. If the bucky centering light is misaligned, it will be necessary to remove the rear
cover. To do this, remove the five (5) 6-32 PH screws.
3. Loosen the bucky line bracket screws (Illustration 3-24).
4. Align the light line by rotating the bracket. Then focus the line sharply by moving the
bracket up or down.
5. Tighten the bucky line bracket screws securely.
6. Recheck the alignment.
Caution The lamp bracket may become very hot and can result in
severe burns. Use long nosed pliers or a similar tool to
hold the bracket during alignment procedures. It is also
important to shield your eyes from the high intensity
lamp.
7. Replace the five (5) 6-32 PH screws to replace the back cover.
Note: For record keeping purposes, the following information should be recorded on the film:
Date of test
Location
Image receptor size being tested
SID distance
Party performing the test
3-33
Service Manual
3-1-10 Shutter Bias Voltage Adjustment

1. Close the 72" horizontal SID switch.
2. Set the x-ray beam angulation to the horizontal direction +/- 2 .
3. Set digital voltmeter to read DC volts.
4. Connect the negative lead to the nut on heat sink of U10.
5. Connect the positive lead to TP-1.
6. Adjust R-23 until the voltmeter reads 1.56 VDC +/- .02V.
3-1-11 72" Horizontal Sid Adjustment
1. Connect the negative meter lead to the nut on heat sink of U10.
2. Connect the positive meter lead to TP-2.
4. Adjust R-10 for 6.00 VDC +/- .02V.
5. Recheck R-23 for 1.56 VDC (TP-1).
Note: Adjusting R-23 and R-10 are interactive operations, and must be repeated until required
voltages are obtained.
3-1-12 40" Horizontal Sid Adjustment

1. Angulate tube to 90 +/- 2 .
3. Connect the negative meter lead to the nut on heat sink of U10 and connect the
positive meter lead to TP-2; check for 4.09 VDC +/- .02V.
4. If voltage is not obtained, adjust R-7.
3-1-13 40" Vertical Sid Adjustment
1. Set the x-ray beam angulation to the vertical direction +/- 2.
2. Close the 40" vertical SID switch.
3. Connect the negative meter lead to the nut on heat sink of U10 and connect the
positive meter lead to TP-2; check for 4.09 VDC +/- .02V.
4. If voltage is not obtained, adjust R-7.
3-34
Service Manual
3-1-14 Shutter Potentiometer Adjustment

1. Close 40" vertical SID switch.
2. Set the long shutter indicator to a 12" dimension on the 40" scale.
3. Connect the negative lead of the meter to the nut of U-10.
4. Connect the positive lead to R-27 on the right side or side that is closest to the top of
the board or TP-8, if present.
5. Adjust the long shutter potentiometer for 2.82 VDC +/- .02V (Illustration 3-28).
6. Set the cross shutter indicator to 12" on the 40" scale.
7. Connect the positive test lead on R-25 on the left side or side that is closest to the
edge connector or TP-7, if present.
8. Adjust the cross shutter potentiometer for 2.82 VDC +/- .01V (refer to Illustration
3-28).
ILLUSTRATION 3-28
SHUTTER POTENTIOMETER ADJUSTMENT
FRONT VIEW
30 Sec.
Timer Board
Cross Field Long Field

Shutter Potentiometer Shutter Potentiometer
3-35
Service Manual
3-1-15 Tray Bias Voltage Adjustment

1. Insert the tray into the bucky with a cassette (any size) locked into place.
2. Connect the negative side of the meter to the nut on heat sink of U10.
3. Connect the positive lead to TP6.
4. Adjust R19 (refer to Logic Board 208056 layout) for 3.41 VDC (0.02 VDC).
6. Adjust R22 for 2.06 VDC (0.02 VDC)
7. Re-check R19 at TP6.
Note: Adjusting R19 and R22 are interactive operations and must be repeated until required
3-1-16 Continuous Sensing Tray Voltages
For reference and troubleshooting purposes, Table 3-4 provides the voltages at test points
TP3 and TP4 (with respect to ground at nut on heat sink of U10) for cassette tray size
sensing. The cross dimension test point is TP3 and the long dimension test point is TP4.
Refer to Logic Board 208056 layout diagram in Chapter 8, Schematics for test point
locations.
TABLE 3-4
IMAGE RECEPTOR VOLTAGES*
I.R. Size (in.) I.R. Voltage I.R. Size (in.) I.R. Voltage
5 2.13 13 (5.12") 2.14

6 2.23 18 (7.08") 2.34
7 2.33 24 (9.45") 2.57
8 2.43 30 (11.81") 2.81
9 2.53 35 (13.78") 3.01
10 2.63 40 (15.75") 3.20
11 2.73 43 (16.93") 3.32
12 2.83
13 2.93
14 3.03
15 3.13
16 3.23
17 3.33
* Calculated values for reference.
Note: I.R. = Image Receptor
3-36
Service Manual

3-2-1 Overview
This section provides the information and procedures necessary to align and calibrate the
collimator.
Several of these procedures require the taking of x-rays. All
personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be
WARNING dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to.
3-2-2 Tools and Materials
Test stand table
Cassettes and film
RMI Collimator Test Tool Model 161A or equivalent
RMI Beam Alignment Test Tool Model 162A or equivalent
3-2-3 Light Field Edges Identification
Definition: The light field is the area illuminated by the light localizer to define the x-ray
field.
Note: Light intensity is factory set between 17 and 22 footcandles. Intensity should be verified
with a footcandle meter such as the Digaphot Model 3300. Refer to Chapter 5, Service
Procedures, for adjusting lamp intensity.
1. Set Source to Image Distance (SID) at 40" to table top (Illustration 2-29).
2. Set collimator shutters to 10" x 10" dimension on 40" scale of legend with the
collimator perpendicular to the test stand table.
3. Dim the room lights.
4. Turn on the collimator light localizer.
5. Place a piece of white paper so that it aligns squarely with the upper right hand edge
of the light field produced by the light localizer striking the table top.
6. Take a second piece of white paper and proceeding from the unilluminated right hand
portion of the table-top, slowly move the paper towards the illuminated area of the
table top.
7. Observe and initially mark the point on the table top paper where the edge
illumination becomes visible on the second sheet.
8. On the right hand side of the light field, measure perpendicular to the edge and make
a second mark 3 mm (.118") toward the center of the illuminated area. This mark
denotes the edge of the field for light calibration purposes.
9. Duplicate this process for the other three sides, measuring in 2 mm (0.079") toward
the center of the illuminated field. These marks now indicate the other three edges of
the light field.
10. Using a straight edge and the marks previously made, carefully draw (parallel and
square) lines to denote the defined edges of the light field.
Note: Right hand side of the field refers to observer's right when facing the collimator front
panel.
3-37
Service Manual
3-2-4 X-ray Field Edges Identification

Definition: As defined by the Performance Standards, the x-ray field is that area of the
x-ray beam from the x-ray focal spot in the plane of the image receptor whose perimeter
is the locus of points at which the exposure rate is one-fourth (25%) of the maximum in
the center of the field.
1. Set Source to Image Distance (SID) at 40" to table top.
2. Set collimator shutters to produce a 10" x 10" dimension field on the 40" scale of the
front panel legend.
3. Ensure that the source assembly is perpendicular to the table top.
4. After making the light field measurements, adjust the x-ray generator exposure
factors to produce a film having an optical density of 2.0 - 5.0.
5. Check the density using a conventional densitometer or by visual comparison with a
"neutral density" filter having a density of 2.0 - 5.0.
6. Take an exposure on a film with dimensions greater than 10" x 10".
7. Place the developed film on a sheet of white paper. Place a second piece of white
paper on the top of one edge of the film and parallel to the edge of the image.
8. Move this paper slowly from the unexposed border of the image towards the exposed
border of the image.
9. When the increased density is barely perceptible, stop. Mark the point with a fine
stylus.
10. Repeat these procedures for the other three sides.
11. Starting on the cathode side of the projection, locate and mark a point 2 mm (approx.
0.079") towards the center of the image.
12. On the other three sides of the image, measure and mark points 1 mm towards the
center of the image.
13. These marks correspond to the defined edges of the x-ray field.
3-2-5 Light Field To X-ray Field Alignment
Requirement: CDRH Performance Standards 21 CFR Subchapter "J" require that
means be provided for visually defining the perimeter of the x-ray field. The total
misalignment of the edges of the visually defined field with the respective edges of the
x-ray field along either the length or width of the visually defined field shall not exceed
2% of the distance from the source to the center of the visually defined field when the
surface upon which it appears is perpendicular to the axis of the x-ray beam. The sum of
cross field misalignment shall not exceed 2% of the source to image distance. The sum of
longitudinal field misalignment shall not exceed 2% of the source to image distance.
If these specifications cannot be met, check the collimator to focal spot distance; also
check for any angulation of the lamp in its socket - it should be perpendicular to the body
of the lamp socket.
1. Before using the test tools, level the table and place the x-ray tube so that the beam
will be perpendicular to the table.
2. Center the tube to the table and use a 40", or actual fixed SID distance from the focal
spot to the table top (refer to Illustration 3-30).
3. Place the Beam Alignment Tool in the center of the Collimator Test Tool and place
both tools in the center of the light field.
4. Adjust the collimator shutters so that the edges of the light field coincide with the
rectangular outline of the Collimator Test Tool.
5. Orient the Collimator Test Tool so that the dot is in the lower left corner (when facing
the collimator). This allows the direction of collimator error to be determined at a
later time.
6. Place an 8" x 10" cassette in the center of the bucky tray (if used).
7. Align the tray (cassette) to the x-ray tube and expose the cassette at approximately 60
kVp, 2 mAs.
3-38
Service Manual
Interpretation Of Results:
Collimation
If the x-ray field falls within the image of the rectangular frame, alignment is within
specification (refer to Illustration 3-29). If an edge of the x-ray field falls on the first spot,
+/- 1 cm (.4") on either side of the line, it shows that the edges of the x-ray field and the
light field are misaligned by 1%. Similarly, an edge falling on the second spot, +/- 2 cm
(.8"), indicates an error of 2% at 1 m (40").
Alignment at one distance does not guarantee alignment at all other distances. It is
advisable to repeat the test at other commonly used distances. Suggested exposures and
allowable errors at different distances are referenced in Table 3-5.
TABLE 3-5
TEST FILM EXPOSURE FACTORS
Distance Between Maximum

Source and Light Field Exposure Factors for Misalignment Allowed
(T/T) RP Film by BRH (2%)
91.4 cm (36") 60 kVp, 2 mAs 1.8 cm (0.72")

1.22 m (48") 60 kVp, 3 mAs 2.4 cm (0.96")
1.82 m (72") 60 kVp, 8 mAs 3.6 cm (1.44")
8. If the light field is off in the long field (left to right) direction, the lamp bracket will
require adjustment. Loosen the two lamp bracket screws and, shielding your eyes
from the high intensity lamp, use a pair of long nosed pliers to shift the bracket right
or left to bring the light field into alignment. Refer to Illustration -33. Re-tighten the
lamp bracket screws.
The lamp operates at very high temperatures. Use appropriate
measures to avoid injury.
WARNING
9. If the light field is off in the cross field (front to back) direction, the mirror will have
to be adjusted. Loosen the Allen (.050) set screw in the mirror adjust tube. Using a
small blade common screwdriver, turn the mirror adjust shaft in or out until the light
field is aligned. Re-tighten the .050 Allen set screw.
10. Attach the back cover and fasten it into place.
11. To verify the alignment, take another exposure.
3-2-6 X-ray Field Size Vs. Indicated Field Size
Requirement: The maximum error permitted between the light field dimensions and the
x-ray field dimensions is 2% of the SID (source to image) used (i.e.: at 40", maximum
error would be +/- .8").
1. Measure the size of the x-ray field (length and width) and compare the measurement
to that indicated on the lens indicators.
2. The lens indicators should be within +/- 2% of the SID (40" or where used). If it is
not, the lens indicators must be adjusted to achieve the tolerance as stated.
3. To adjust the lens indicators, remove the four screws holding the outer shroud in
place. Remove the shutter adjust knobs.
4. Slide the outer shroud forward and remove it from the inner housing.
5. Remove the bottom cover with the face mask by removing the four screws holding it
in place. Adjust the light field to 12" x 12".
6. Starting with the long field shutters, loosen the two screws on the shutter block
assembly (refer to Illustration 3-36).
7. Being careful not to disturb the shutters, you should now be able to move the shutter
block assembly without moving the shutters.
8. Set the long field lens indicator to read 8" at 40" SID (or where used).
3-39
Service Manual
9. Now tighten the two shutter block assembly screws.

10. Move the long shutter lens indicator to the full open position. This will now expose
the access slot for adjusting the cross shutters.
11. Without disturbing the cross shutters, loosen the two screws on the cross shutter block
assembly.
12. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the cross shutter block.
13. Tighten the two cross shutter block assembly screws.
14. The lens indicators should now be fully adjusted. Replace the bottom housing cover,
face mask and outer shroud.
15. Repeat this procedure for 72" SID. Requirement: at 2% of the SID, maximum error
would be +/- 1.4".
3-2-7 X-ray Field And Image Receptor Alignment
Requirement: Means shall be provided to align the center of the x-ray field with respect
to the image receptor to within 2% of the Source to Image Distance (SID).
1. To determine the center of the image receptor, draw diagonal lines from corner to
corner of the x-ray film.
2. Alternately, the film can be folded in half and creased at the center. The two lines will
cross in the center of the image receptor (film).
3. Draw diagonal lines from the corners of the imaged x-ray field.
4. If the centers of the x-ray field and the image receptor are the same, the diagonals of
both sets of lines should cross at the same point. At 40", the error between the image
receptor and the x-ray field should not be greater than 2% of the SID [approximately
2 cm (0.8") for 40" source - table distance]. Refer to Illustration 3-29.
3-2-8 Beam Alignment
Requirement: According to BRH specification, the x-ray beam should be perpendicular
to the image receptor.
If the image receptor is parallel to the table top, the perpendicularity of the x-ray beam
can be checked using the beam alignment test tool with the Collimator Test Tool.
1. If the images of the two steel balls overlap (refer to Illustration 3-34, example A), the
central ray is perpendicular within 0.5 .
2. If the image of the top ball (larger shadow) intercepts the first circle (Illustration 3-34,
example B), the beam is about 1.5 away from the perpendicular.
3. If the image of the top ball intercepts the second circle, the misalignment is
approximately 3 (Illustration 3-34, example C).
4. Align the system for perpendicularity, 1.5, using set screws provided on tube
support.
3-40
Service Manual
3-2-9 Cross Hair to Light Field Center Alignment

1. Remove four screws on the bottom outer shroud and the two shutter adjust knobs.
2. Slide outer shroud forward to remove it from the inner housing.
3. Loosen by one turn each of the four screws adjacent to the face mask on the bottom
of the collimator (refer to Illustration 3-35).
4. Turn on the collimator lamp and align the center of the cross hairs with the center of
the light field, being careful to stay square (aligned) with the light field.
5. Re-tighten the four screws loosened in Step 3.
6. Re-check the alignment.
7. Replace the outer shroud.
8. Re-install and tighten the four screws that hold the outer shroud in place. Re-install
the shutter adjust knobs.
3-2-10 Bucky Light Line to Light Field Alignment
Since the bucky centering light is integral with longitudinal centering of the image
receptor, it must also be within 2% of the SID used.
1. Activate the collimator light localizer and using a straight edge, check to see that the
bucky light line is centered with the central bar of the cross-field, cross-hair image.
2. If the bucky centering light is misaligned, it will be necessary to remove the rear
cover. To do this, remove the five (5) 6-32 PH screws.
3. Loosen the bucky line bracket screws (Illustration -33).
4. Align the light line by rotating the bracket. Then focus the line sharply by moving the
bracket up or down.
5. Tighten the bucky line bracket screws securely.
6. Re-check the alignment.
Caution: The lamp bracket may become very hot and can result in
severe burns. Use long nosed pliers or a similar tool to
hold the bracket during alignment procedures. It is also
important to shield your eyes from the high intensity
lamp.
7. Replace the back cover and secure it with the five (5) 6-32 PH screws.
General Note: For record keeping purposes, the following information should be recorded on each test
film:
Date of test
Location
Image receptor size being tested
SID distance
Party performing the test
3-41
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-30
PLACEMENT OF COLLIMATOR AND ALIGNMENT TOOL
X-RAY TUBE
SOURCE-TO-TABLE
DISTANCE: 40"
BEAM ALIGNMENT TOOL
COLLIMATOR TOOL
CASSETTE IN BUCKY TRAY
ALGNTOOL.EPS
ILLUSTRATION 3-29
INTERPRETATION OF FILM/RECEPTOR ALIGNMENT
6
1
5
2
3
4
CENTER OF
5
2
X-RAY FIELD
6
1
8 7 6 5 4 2 1 1 2 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 8 7 5 4 3 2 1
1
6
2
CENTER OF FILM
4
3
5
2
6
INTERPRETATION.CDR
(ENLARGED VIEW)
CENTERING
ERROR
3-42
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-31
INTERPRETATION OF GOOD FIELD ALIGNMENT
ILLUSTRATION 3-32
INTERPRETATION OF UNACCEPTABLE FIELD ALIGNMENT
3-43
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-34
INTERPRETATION OF BEAM ALIGNMENT
A B C
ALIGN1.EPS
ILLUSTRATION 3-33
LAMP BRACKET ADJUSTMENT
3-44
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 3-35
BOTTOM VIEW OF COLLIMATOR
Face Mask Screws

ILLUSTRATION 3-36
SHUTTER ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
BOTTOM VIEW
Shutter Adj. Screws
3-45
Service Manual
SECTION 4
VERTICAL BUCKY NO CALIBRATION REQUIRED
SECTION 5
TUBE STAND NO CALIBRATION REQUIRED
3-46
Service Manual
CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
SECTION 1
TABLE
1-1 Operational Check

When the assembly and electrical connections have been completed, perform the
following tests to verify the table's travel and vertical operations. Tests for the table's
elevating function is required only for models B-180M6F and B-190M6F.
1-1-1 Check the Float Operation
Depress the four-way float pedal. The table top should move freely in either direction and
the bucky housing should move freely in the longitudinal direction. Release the foot
pedal. This energizes all magnets, locking the table top and bucky housing securely.
Note: Depressing the bucky switch should release the bucky magnet only.
1-1-2 Check the Up/Down Pedals

Depress the Up and then the Down foot pedal. The following should occur while the foot
pedal is depressed:
1. The table top should start to move either up or down according to which foot pedal is
depressed.
2. The four-way float foot pedal (the outside pedals) should be INACTIVE (the table
top four-way floating action should remain locked) while the table top is in motion.
1-1-3 Check the Table Position
Position the table top into its approximate central position. Lower the table top until it
stops. The table top should measure approximately 20" from the floor. While the table is
in its lowest position, the four-way float foot pedal should remain inactive. Now raise the
table top until it stops. The table top should measure approximately 31 1/2" from the
floor. Refer to Illustration 4-1.
ILLUSTRATION 4-1
TABLETOP POSITIONS
If a modification in the height limits (lower and upper) is required to meet these
specifications, it is necessary to adjust the Up/Down Limit Board located at the front of
the base.
4-1
Service Manual
1-1-4 Adjusting the Up/Down Limit Board

Loosen the three (3) screws holding down the Up/Down Limit Board. Move the board to
the left to increase the maximum height and to the right to decrease the maximum height.
When these adjustments have been completed, retighten the screws. Refer to Illustration
4-2 to see the location of the Up/Down Limit Board.
ILLUSTRATION 4-2
UP/DOWN LIMIT BOARD
1-1-5 Emergency Stop Switch Check

Check that the Emergency Stop switch stops table up/down motion when activated. To
release switch, rotate knob counter-clockwise. The Emergency Stop switch check is
required only for models B-180M6F and B-190M6F.
4-2
Service Manual
SECTION 2
GENERATOR
2-1 Visual Inspection

Requirements are pass or fail. Service is required if any Requirement is failed. After each
Requirement is verified, place a check in its box. Record notes and comments next to the
Requirement.
Inspect Requirement Inspectors Notes
Operators Control panel overlays free from cuts or punctures.

Console Switch and display markings and symbols clearly
legible.
Verify good condition of x-ray emission symbol on
console.
Rating Plate installed on right rear side of console
and Rating Plate legible.
Generator No dents in covers.
Cabinet Rating Plate installed on right side of cabinet and
Rating Plate legible.
2-2 Functional Check
Power On Changing Power switch position from OFF to ON

makes the operator control panels illuminate and
CAUTION displays GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS ANATOMICAL
SOFTWARE.
RADIATION
HAZARD Verify proper operation of all operator controls (e.g.
kVp can be increased and decreased, mA can be
Close
increased and decreased,etc.).
collimator
blades and Verify proper operation of all operator console
move tube to displays and indicators.
lowest position.
Verify proper operation of room door interlocks.
Select lowest
kVp and mAs Pressing PREP button causes the tube anode to
settings. rotate.
Pressing the EXPOSE button makes an exposure.
The x-ray tone sounds and x-ray on indicator lights.
4-3
Service Manual
SECTION 3
COLLIMATOR

Requirement.
Collimator Switch and display markings and symbols clearly

legible.
Switches and control knobs not loose or damaged.
SID indicating tape attached to left side.
Rating Plate installed on rear side of collimator and
Rating Plate legible.
Must be no movement between collimator and tube
unit.
Rotational Lock knob on right side of collimator.
4-4
Service Manual
Collimator Collimator Interface Plate is securely fastened to

x-ray tube. If not, DO NOT USE. Service is
required.
Four screws hold collimator securely to Collimator
Interface Plate. If not, DO NOT USE. Service is
required.
SID tape extends to 6 ft. (1830 mm).
SID tape retracts automatically.
Must be no movement between collimator and tube
unit.
Pressing field light button on collimator turns field
light on.
Rotational Lock Knob rotates counter-clockwise to
rotate collimator (When viewed from knob side of
collimator).
Tightening Rotational Lock Knob clockwise will
secure collimator in any position.
Collimator rotates 180 from center to either side
(depending on wire routing).
Rotational Detent engages at center and at 90 to
either side of center.
Rotating transverse (lateral) and longitudinal field
sizing knobs moves the respective collimator
blades.
SECTION 4
VERTICAL BUCKY

Requirement.
Vertical Wall Ion chamber and cassette markings are legible.

Stand Wall Stand column is tight and solid in its mounting.
Rating Plate installed on left side of Collar Assembly
and Rating Plate legible.
4-5
Service Manual
Vertical Wall Bucky/fixed grid cabinet travels smoothly from top to

Stand bottom of the column.
Cassette tray slides in and out of bucky/fixed grid
cabinet.
Cassette tray guides and lock handle operate
properly.
Lock prevents bucky/fixed grid cabinet travel.
SECTION 5
TUBE STAND

Requirement.
Tube Stand Tube support column is tight and solid in its

mounting.
No dents in covers or floor rail.
Cable routing is proper. External cables and wiring
are not worn or damaged.
Rating Plate installed on lower right side of tube
stand and Rating Plate legible.
4-6
Service Manual
Tube Stand Vertical Tube Column rotates 90 from front position

to either side.
Tube arm moves smoothly from bottom to top of
tube column.
Tube arm extends and retracts smoothly.
Tube stand moves smoothly from left to right of floor
rail.
Tube unit rotates 180 to horizontal in both directions
(depending on wiring).
SID indicators (on handgrip) illuminate as required.
Lock prevents vertical travel.
Lock prevents tube extension.
Lock prevents tube rotation.
4-7
Service Manual
4-8
Service Manual
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE PROCEDURES
SECTION 1
TABLE
1-1 Theory of Operation

1-1-1 System Operation
The table top floats or rides on eight ball bearing assemblies located inside the table top
area. Each longitudinal bearing assembly consists of precision machined steel blocks with
five (5) bearings bolted to each block assembly (totaling 20 ball-bearings for longitudinal
table travel). Four linear bearings translate on hardened and polished steel shafts which
permit transverse travel of the table top.
Four electro-magnets (24 VDC) are positioned extremely close to the rails that the
bearings ride on. These magnets grab the steel rails securely, locking the longitudinal
travel of the table. Four solenoid-operated fail-safe tilt locks are used to grab the
transverse shafts, locking the transverse travel of the table. Depressing the four-way float
pedal de-energizes the magnets and energizes the solenoids, allowing the table top to
float freely.
The bucky housing assembly rides on four linear ball-bearings mounted to adjustable
brackets attached to either side of the housing. These bearings travel on the hardened and
polished steel shafts of the bucky carriage. One electro-magnet on the underside of the
housing locks the bucky into place until the bucky lock release switch is depressed,
thereby releasing the magnets hold and allowing free movement of the bucky.
1-2 Vertical Travel (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)
Vertical table travel is performed by an electric linear actuator assembly inside the base.
The actuator is pinned to the welded steel drive plate of the steel scissor assembly which
extends (upward) and retracts (downward) depending on which foot pedal is depressed.
1-3 Up-Down Motion Limitation (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)
Limitation of travel for the scissor assembly is accomplished by a link connected to the
scissors in such a way as to slide a flag along the Up/Down Limit Board until the flag
breaks the beam in the opto-interrupter (either up or down depending on direction of
travel). The travel range is factory preset to 31-1/2" table top to floor (upper limit) to 20"
table top to floor (lower limit). When the table is used in a PBL system, the Up Limit
Circuit is wired in series with the system PBL circuit to prevent exposures when the table
is not in its full up position.
1-4 Pedal Operation
1-4-1 Four-Way Tables
These tables have only one foot pedal (four-way float) which operates an opto-interrupter
on the Lock Control Board.
1-4-2 Hi-Lo Elevating (Six-Way) Tables
The foot pedals have sheet metal tabs which ride in the open slot of the opto-interrupter
(one for each pedal) so that when a pedal is depressed, the tab moves out of the beam of
the opto-interrupter. The left four-way release, the Up pedal and the Down pedal, work
on the Limit Board shared with the Up/Down limit switches. The right four-way release
pedal has its own sense board. Both boards are plugged into the Six-Way Logic Board via
plug-in cables.
5-1
Service Manual
1-5 Four-Way Tables

1-5-1 Four-Way Table Lock Control Board, 208242
This board consists of a power transformer, an optical interrupter and two MOSFETS to
control the four-way float locks. The power transformer, T1, provides 32 VDC at both C2
and C3.
When the four-way float pedal is not depressed, a flag interrupts the light beam in U1,
thus turning on Q1, providing 36 volts to the longitudinal magnets. Q2 is turned off.
When the pedal is depressed, the flag on U1 is removed, Q1 turns off and Q2 turns on,
providing a 32-volt kick to release the transverse solenoids, which then drops to a 13-volt
holding voltage due to current limit resistors R1 and R2. This releases all of the locks and
allows the table top to float. The bucky magnetic lock has its own release switch for
bucky positioning.
1-6 Six-way (Hi-Lo Elevating) Tables
The tables major electrical components include the AC transformer and fuse block,
printed circuit boards, magnetic locks and the associated wiring harnesses, the motor and
the Up-Down Limit Board. It is suggested that you refer to Section 6, Schematics, for the
corresponding schematic diagram as you review this section.
1-6-1 Four-Way Pedal Board, 208126
The Four-Way Pedal Board has an optical interrupter which is part of the foot pedal
switch located at the right side of the table. The output of this optical switch connects to
the Up-Down Limit Board.
1-6-2 Up-Down Limit Board, 208125
The Up-Down Limit Board has the optical interrupter for the foot pedal switch located
at the left side of the table, the two optical interrupters for the Up and Down foot pedal
switches, and the two optical interrupters which sense that the travel limits for the table
have been reached. The boards five optical switch outputs, and the output from the
Four-Way Pedal Board, are connected to the Six- Way Logic Board.
1-6-3 Six-Way Logic Board, 208108
The Six-Way Logic Board uses the five optical switch input signals from the Up-Down
Limit Board and the one from the Four-Way Pedal Board to control the motor and
locking magnets for the table. There is also a regulator for the DC voltage supplied to the
motor, two safety timeout protection circuits, and a PBL control relay.
1-6-4 Voltage Regulator
28 VAC is supplied to the board from the AC transformer, and is rectified and filtered by
bridge rectifier DB1 and capacitor C1, respectively, to produce 45 VDC unregulated
voltage. The voltage regulator is a switching type, and is comprised of the pulse width
modulator control IC U5, current boost MOSFETS Q12, Q13, Q14, filter inductor L1,
filter capacitor C7, and related circuitry. It produces a regulated 25 VDC at 10 amperes,
and is current limited and short-circuit protected.
1-6-5 Motor Drive
The table motor is a DC motor and can be driven in both directions by a power MOSFET
H-bridge, consisting of MOSFETS Q1 - Q8. The direction of motor drive to move the
table up or down is controlled by the signals supplied from the foot pedal switches from
the Up-Down Limit Board. The up and down signals go to U1 pins 6 and 7, respectively,
and control which MOSFETS are turned on to drive the motor in the desired direction.
1-6-6 Locking Magnets
The magnetic locks are released by actuating the right- or left-most foot pedal switches
(the Four-Way Float Switches), and re-engaged by either releasing the foot pedal
switches or by the timeout circuitry described below. Power MOSFET Q11 controls the
four transverse solenoid locks. The four longitudinal locks are controlled by U1 pin 18,
5-2
Service Manual
which in turn feeds the power MOSFET on the Inverter Board. Additionally, the bucky
magnetic lock has its own release switch for bucky positioning.
1-6-7 Positive Beam Location
Relay K1 is energized when the table is at its maximum up position to indicate the 40"
SID position.
1-6-8 Timeout Protection Circuitry
IC U3 and its related circuitry is a 12-second safety timeout which shuts off the motor if
it is ever driven longer than 12 seconds, which does not happen under normal
circumstances. (This could happen if, for example, an excessive load were on the table,
stalling the motor before the up limit switch is reached, with the up foot pedal switch still
being actuated.)
IC U4 and its related circuitry is another safety timeout which re-engages the locks after
one minute.
1-6-9 Emergency Stop Switch
An Emergency Stop push-button switch is provided on six-way (Hi-Lo Elevating) tables.
The Emergency Stop switch is located on the left side of the table below the table top.
When the switch is activated, power is immediately removed from all circuits in the table.
5-3
Service Manual
SECTION 2
GENERATOR
2-1 Overview
This section is for system users or technicians to assist in locating and correcting minor
system faults, should they occur. Many of these faults can be corrected without a service
technician. System faults that require the attention of a service representative are
referenced in Section 8, Planned Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
2-2 Error Messages And Descriptions
When the unit will not fire, an audible alert will sound twice and one or more error
codes will appear on the display.
Refer to the following descriptions for assistance in interpreting the fault code displayed
on the Operator Control Panel:
BUCKY? A bucky has been selected but did not return the ready signal to start
exposure.
CALIB? The calibration data in the EE Prom is not correct.
DOOR? Indicates that the entrance door is open.
FAULT? Indicates that there is a problem with the AEC.
FIELD? Control tried to take an exposure with AEC mode enabled, but an
AEC field was not selected.
FILAM? Indicates that there is a problem with the filament control circuit
voltage.
HYFOB? (Hold Your Finger On Button) Exposure terminated prematurely
because the EXPOSE key was released before the exposure was
completed.
KVP? Indicates that there is a problem with the anode kVp circuit or anode
high voltage transformer.
KVP-C? Indicates a problem with the cathode circuit or cathode high voltage
transformer.
LINE? Indicates that the input line is out of range. Check the input bus bar.
MAS? Indicates that the unit is set for 0" mAs and therefore, no exposure can
be initiated. Check the mAs selected.
MASTR? Problem with the master EE Prom being copied from or to.
NO MA? Control tried to take an exposure, but there was no tube current during
exposure time.
PAPER? The internal printer is out of paper.
PBL? Positive beam limitation circuit is open; check collimator.
PHASE? One of the three input phases is missing; check input power.
PRNTR? Indicates a problem exists between the control and the printer.
RELAY? Indicates a problem with the back up contactor.
RETRY? EE Prom programmed did not correctly save data. Try again or replace
EE Prom being copied to.
ROTOR? Tube rotor is too hot or not getting correct current to start. Check rotor
circuit.
5-4
Service Manual
S.E.S.? Stored Energy Source voltage is low; leave unit on to restore voltage.
Ready Lamp lights steadily when the batteries are charged, indicating
the system is ready to take an exposure. If the Ready light is off, the
batteries are not charged. An S.E.S. error is displayed when the PREP
key is pressed.
TIMER? A problem exists with the timer circuit. Call for service.
TUBE Indicates that you have exceeded the tube maximum load capability.
OVERLOAD Reduce technique factors.
2-3 Possible Faults
2-3-1 System Circuit Breaker On And LCD Display Is Dark
Is the power line plugged into the receptable or connected to the main circuit breaker?
Is there power at the receptable or the main circuit breaker?
Is the remote ON/OFF switch on the OCP in the ON position?
Has the Auto Shut Off feature been activated? If the system was left unattended for
sixty minutes or more, the Automatic Shut Off feature was activated. Reset the
system by turning the circuit breaker back to the ON position.
2-3-2 No Exposure
Are any error messages displayed?
2-3-3 Printer Does Not Print (or Does Not Print Properly)
Is power on?
Is there paper (or labels) in the printer?
Is the ribbon cartridge properly installed?
Is the printer connected to the system at the microprocessor board?
Is the cable attached to the printer?
Run Printer diagnostic test.
5-5
Service Manual
2-3-4 Image Quality

Motion artifacts? Relax the patient. Make the patient as comfortable as possible.
Check once again for proper positioning.
Is there not enough contrast? Decrease kVp. Check the dark room, film expiration
date, chemicals and developer temperature.
2-3-5 Fault Reset (AEC)
Is the proper chamber selected?
Is chamber plugged in?
Is film speed correct?
If film is too dark, decrease density.
If film is too light, have the system calibration checked.
2-4 Programming
The Silhouette HF High-Frequency x-ray generator features powerful programming and
utility capabilities. These include Auto-Tech technique programming and
Utility/Maintenance operations which include the following:
IC (integrated circuit) duplication
Printing of Auto-Tech technique parameters
System calibration
Automated testing
5-6
Service Manual
2-4-1 Auto-Tech Technique Programming

The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions for editing an existing
technique or writing a new one and adding it to the Auto-Tech memory. Auto-Tech has
the capability of recalling up to 72 anatomical views by storing up to 9 techniques in each
of the 8 anatomical regions. Any of the existing x-ray techniques can be edited to suit the
individual needs of your practice.
2-4-1-1 Auto-Tech Technique Edit/Create Procedure
1. Press AUTO-TECH to select Auto-Tech mode.
2. Select the region of interest (ROI) where the technique is (to be) stored by pressing
the corresponding function key. For example, to edit the LUMBAR region, select
LUMBAR from the Auto-Tech Menu. To access the settings for tomography, select
the SPECIAL function key.
ILLUSTRATION 5-1
AUTO-TECH MENU
SKULL L-SPINE
CHEST ABDOMEN
C-SPINE EXTREMITY
T-SPINE SPECIAL
3. Select the anatomical view for the particular region where the technique is located by
pressing the corresponding function key. To add a new anatomical view, press the
function key associated with a blank field (if a blank field is available).
ILLUSTRATION 5-2
ANATOMICAL VIEW SELECTION MENU
1
LUMBAR
A. P.
SAC / COC
LATERAL SAC / LAT
OBLIQUE PELVIS
5-7
Service Manual
4. The selected anatomical view and ROI with the current technique parameters will be
displayed as shown in the example below:
ILLUSTRATION 5-3
SELECTED VIEW FOR TECHNIQUE EDIT
CM
34
LUMBAR
KVP
A. P. 90
TUBE: 1 MA
SID: 40 300L
400 MAX. SEC
SPD 0.080
DENSITY MAS
N 0.0
KHU: 0
5. Turn the key switch. The Utility Menu will be displayed. Select EDIT by pressing the
corresponding function key.
ILLUSTRATION 5-4
UTILITY MENU
UTILITY
EDIT
CALIB COPY
MASTER
TEST COPY
EEPROM
THK REF PRINT80
PREV
5-8
Service Manual
6. The selected anatomical view and ROI will be displayed (or blank for new view) in
the Technique Edit Menu as shown below. The selected region and the first letter of
the anatomical view are highlighted.
ILLUSTRATION 5-5
TECHNIQUE EDIT MENU
LUMBAR A. P.
TUBE SID: MA
1 40 300L
CM KVP MA
BUCKY 16 90 16.0
TABLE 20 90 26.6
24 90 34.0
28 90 47.0
400 32 90 61.0
SPD 36 90 87.0
40 90 101.0
44 90 114.0
BACKUP 48 90 140.0
0.080 52 90 180.0
7. The Technique Edit Menu shows all technique information onscreen simultaneously,
including the CM, KVP and MAS selections for all ten (10) settings. All setting
modifications and field selections are performed from this single menu.
Illustration 5-6 represents a section of the Operator Control Panel (OCP) and
references specific key usage in Technique Edit Mode. Please refer to this figure as
you proceed:
a. Single arrow increment keys function as Field Edit keys. For example, use the
single arrow keys to edit the alphanumeric characters in the name of the
anatomical view, select between Tube 1 and Tube 2, choose the Bucky mode, set
the film speed, etc.
b. Double arrow increment keys function as Field Advance keys, allowing for
cursor movement from field to field. Use the UP arrow key to return to the
previous field and the DOWN arrow key to advance to the next field.
c. The ENTER key functions similarly to the double arrow DOWN key and allows
you to advance to the next field.
ILLUSTRATION 5-6
KEY USAGE IN TECHNIQUE EDIT MODE
LUMBAR A.P.
TUBE SID: MA
1 40 300L
1 3
CM KVP MA
BUCKY 16 90 16.0
TABLE 20 90 26.6 2
24 90 34.0 4
28 90 47.0
400 32 90 61.0
SPD 36 90 87.0
40 90 101.0
44 90 114.0
BACKUP 48 90 140.0
0.080 52 90 180.0
ENTER
5-9
Service Manual
8. To edit the displayed anatomical view name, use the upper right and left Function
keys to position the cursor and the Field Edit keys to select the desired character. A
name can have up to nine alphanumeric characters. Please note that blank spaces, the
first selectable character before the letter A, are displayed as a blank in the
appropriate space. When editing is complete, press ENTER or the Field Advance
(double arrow down) key to advance to the next field, Tube selection.
Note: TUBE selection applies to two-tube units only.
ILLUSTRATION 5-7
TUBE SELECTION
LUMBAR A. P.
TUBE SID: MA
1 40 300L
CM KVP MA
BUCKY 16 90 16.0
TABLE 20 90 26.6
24 90 34.0
28 90 47.0
400 32 90 61.0
SPD 36 90 87.0
40 90 101.0
44 90 114.0
BACKUP 48 90 140.0
0.080 52 90 180.0
Select either TUBE 1 or 2 by pressing the Field Edit keys until the required tube is
displayed. Press ENTER to advance to SID selection.
9. Use the Field Edit keys to select from the available SID settings: 36, 40, 48, 72. When
the desired value is displayed, press ENTER to advance to mA selection.
10. Select an mA station by using the Field Edit keys to select from the available mA
settings: note that the mAs settings will change according to the selected mA. (Refer
to Table 2-1 in Section 2, General Information for model dependant mA stations.)
When the desired mA setting is displayed, press ENTER to advance to BUCKY
selection.
11. Select the desired BUCKY mode with the Field Edit keys. Select from the following
possibilities: WALL, TABLE, NON-W(wall) and NON-T(table).
12. Select the required AEC setting using the AEC Field Select keys. If no chambers are
selected, OFF appears under AEC. Select film screen speed with the Field Edit keys.
Press ENTER.
13. Select Backup Time. Use the keyboard to enter the back up time. The field will flash
during keyboard entry. Press ENTER to accept the desired value. Press ENTER again
to advance to the next field, CM.
14. Select measurement parameters for the CM value.
a. The first value in the CM column defines the smallest possible value for the
selected view (as shown in Illustration 5-8). Possible selections are 1 through 16.
Use the Field Edit keys to select the desired value. When this value has been
selected, press ENTER to advance to the second value in the CM column.
b. The second value ranges from a value of 1 to 4 greater than the first value. This
difference is the increment factor and is used by the system to automatically
calculate the remaining cm settings for a total of ten settings, thereby covering the
range of the anatomical sizes expected.
5-10
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 5-8
CM SELECTION
LUMBAR A. P.
TUBE SID MA
1 40 300 L
BUCKY CM KVP MAS

TABLE 16 90 16.0
20 90 26.0
24 90 34.0
400 28 90 47.0
SPD 32 90 61.0
36 90 87.0
BACKUP 40 90 101.0
0.080 44 90 114.0
48 90 140.0
52 90 180.0
c. Use the Field Edit keys to modify the increment factor according to your
requirements. The remaining eight cm settings are automatically calculated
according to the selected increment factor. When entry has been satisfactorily
completed, press ENTER to advance to the KVP field for exposure factor
selection.
15. You are now ready to select exposure factors for the selected view for each cm
selection. For each cm setting, select a kVp and mAs value.
a. To increase or decrease the displayed KVP setting, use the Field Edit keys or
numeric keypad. When the desired value is displayed, press ENTER to access the
MAS field.
b. To increase or decrease the displayed MAS setting, use either the Field Edit keys
or the keypad. If the keypad is used, the values will flash during entry and it is
necessary to press ENTER to accept the selection.
c. When the desired exposure factors for the displayed cm setting are displayed,
press ENTER. Repeat this sequence to select exposure factors (base kVp and mAs
value) for each cm setting.
Note: If selected kVp/mAs settings exceed tube limits, a flashing question mark (?) will appear
to the right of the mAs display.
d. After the tenth cm setting has been selected and ENTER is pressed, the edited
x-ray techniques will be stored in memory. The message PLEASE WAIT
followed by TECHNIQUE COMPLETE will be displayed momentarily across
the bottom of the display. After the technique has been stored, the Technique Edit
Menu will automatically advance to the next anatomical view to be edited. You
can continue to edit or choose to exit the technique edit mode.
15. To edit additional x-ray techniques, repeat this entire procedure as necessary for each
technique. Use the double arrow UP key to provide movement through the eight
anatomical views without having to exit technique edit mode.
From the anatomical view name in the Technique Edit Menu, press the double arrow
UP key to scroll through the other views for that particular region of interest until the
Anatomical View Selection Menu reappears.
From the Anatomical View Selection Menu, use the double arrow UP/DOWN keys to
move through the anatomical views; press the appropriate function key to access a
particular view.
To exit the technique edit mode, turn the key switch. The Auto-Tech Menu will be
displayed. From this menu, you can turn the key switch to access the Utility Menu
and utility/maintenance operations.
5-11
Service Manual
2-4-2 Print80 (Printing Auto-Tech Technique Parameters)

Using an 80-column printer, this utility allows you to print all techniques stored in the
Auto-Tech memory. If a printer is already connected to your system, continue with this
step. If not, refer to Section 5, Installation, Connecting A Printer.
1. Press PRINT sector key. The message PRINTING will be displayed while the
printer provides you with a hard copy of all techniques stored in memory. The last
page of the print-out will contain relevant system data.
2. When printing is complete, the Utility Menu is re-displayed.
2-4-3 Test (Running System Test Programs)
This facility allows you to manually select and run an automated memory, bucky, printer
or cm measurement test. For detailed information, refer to Using The Diagnostic Utilites
paragraph in this section.
2-4-3-1 Procedure
1. To access the test facility, press the TEST function key. The Test Menu will be
displayed.
2. Press the function key that corresponds with the test you want to perform. Test status
and messages will be displayed onscreen.
3. Press PREV to exit this screen and return to the Utility Menu.
2-4-4 Calibration
This facility allows you to calibrate the SES measurement, the D.C. reference
measurement, the kVp accuracy and the mA accuracy. Please refer to Chapter 3,
Calibration, for detailed procedures.
2-5 Diagnostic Utilities
The x-ray generator has an internal, user-selectable, self-diagnostic test utility to help
locate problems rapidly and reduce downtime. If necessary, test routines can be
performed to help isolate potential faults. These routines are accessed from the Utility
Menu.
2-5-1 Using The Diagnostic Utilities
To access diagnostic test mode, proceed as follows:
1. First access the Utility Menu by turning the key switch once from the operating mode
menu.
ILLUSTRATION 5-8A
UTILITY MENU
UTILITY
EDIT
COPY
CALIB MASTER
COPY
TEST EEPROM
THK REF PRINT80
PREV
5-12
Service Manual
2. Press the TEST function key to access the Test Menu:

ILLUSTRATION 5-8B
TEST MENU
TEST
MEMORY D2A
BUCKY PRINTER
CM MEAS CLOCK
PREV ERRORS
NOT
APPLICABLE
3. To access any of the test utilities, press the corresponding function key.
4. To exit test mode without selecting a function, press PREV. The system will return to
the Utility Menu.
2-5-1-1 Test Utility Routine Description - Memory Diagnostic:
If you choose to test the memory, it will immediately start to test the Main
Microprocessor, followed by the Operator Control Panel Microprocessor. As illustrated
in the figure below, the sequence is as follows: the MAIN ROM (read only memory),
followed by the MAIN RAM (random access memory), the EEPROM (electrically
erasable programmable read only memory), the PANL ROM and finally, the PANL
RAM.
ILLUSTRATION 5-8C
MEMORY DIAGNOSTICS
#TESTS #BAD
MAIN ROM
(36A1) 16 0
MAIN RAM 16 0
EEPROM 16 0
(E81C)
PANL ROM 16
(C143) 0
PANL RAM 16 0
These tests will continue until the power is turned off. The number of times each is tested
will appear on the display under the #TESTS column. For each failure that occurs, the
number in the #BAD column will be incremented.
To exit memory diagnostic test routines and return to normal operating mode, set the
power switch to OFF, then back to ON position.
5-12A
Service Manual
2-5-1-2 Test Utility Routine Description - Bucky Diagnostic:

This test sequence counts the response time of the bucky and displays an OK or ERROR
message as shown below. If an error is detected, the OCP will emit two audible tones.
ILLUSTRATION 5-8D
BUCKY DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
BUCKY 1 0 OK
BUCKY 2 64000 ERROR
Upon completion of the test, the Test Menu will be re-displayed.

2-5-1-3 Test Utility Routine Description - D2A Self Test:
This facility generates a stepped voltage ramp to test digital to analog circuits.
1. If system is equipped with AEC, unplug A10-J1 connector.
2. From the Test Menu, press D2A. The screen displays:
ILLUSTRATION 5-8E
D2A TEST FUNCTION MENU
D2A RAMP
3. Connect a scope to A4-TP3 to verify that a 0 to 10.2 volt positive going ramp exists
(with no missing steps). The ramp should have a 0.5 second duration and repetition.
4. Repeat Step 3 with the scope connected to A8-TP3.
5. Connect the scope probe to A5-U3-Pin 14. A negative going ramp (from 0 to -5.0 +/-
0.3 volts) should be observed with no missing steps. Duration and repetition rates
should be 0.5 seconds.
6. Exit and return to normal operating mode by setting the power switch to OFF, then
back to ON.
5-12B
Service Manual
2-5-1-4 Test Utility Routine Description - Printer Test:

This facility performs a printer self-test for the internal printer, generating a test label as
shown below:
ILLUSTRATION 5-8F
TEST LABEL
FIRST LINE PRINTS IN

RED.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. /- ( )*:012345
6789+ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. /-( )*:01
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. /- ( )*:012345
6789+ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. /-( )*:01
If a label does not print, the appropriate error message will appear onscreen. For a
description of error messages, refer to Error Messages And Descriptions paragraph in this
section.
5-12C
Service Manual
2-5-1-5 Test Utility Routine Description - Clock:

This option allows you to reset the real-time clock if necessary. It is possible to set the
date and/or time. By selecting the STOP CLK option, it is possible to shut off the
oscillator, thereby conserving battery life (clock battery life is over 10 years). To restart
the system clock, select SET DATE/TIME.
ILLUSTRATION 5-8G
SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK
SET DATE STOP CLK
DATE
SET TIME
FORMAT
SET DATE/TIME
PREV D D/M M/Y Y

D A T E: 4/02/9 3
T I M E: 17:09:07
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time. The date can be entered in either
international or U.S. format. Press DATE FORMAT to select the required format. Note
that the DD/MM/YY field format changes to reflect your choice. The time is entered in
24-hour time, according to the field prompts. Press ENTER to accept selections.
ILLUSTRATION 5-8H
SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK
SET DATE STOP CLK
SET TIME DATE

FORMAT
ENTER DATE
M M /D D / Y Y
4 / 0 2 / 9 1
PREV
D D/M M/Y Y
D A T E: 4/02/93
T I M E: 17:09:07
5-12D
Service Manual
2-6 IC Duplication
2-6-1 Copy MASTER
The following are procedures to copy Auto-Tech (imaging technique) data from ICs located
in the MASTER socket (U26) to ICs placed in the EEPROM socket (U3) of the
microprocessor board (A3). Any imaging technique data resident on the IC in the EEPROM
socket will be erased and overwritten with the imaging technique data of the IC located in the
MASTER socket. All other data resident on the EEPROM socket IC (including calibration
data) remains unaffected. Proceed as follows:
1. Turn power off and remove the cover panel to access the microprocessor board.
2. Insert master EEPROM (P/N 2224361) into MASTER socket (U26) on the
microprocessor board (A3).
3. Turn power on and access the Utility Menu by turning the key switch.
4. Press the COPY MASTER function key. The screen will display:
ILLUSTRATION 5-8I
IC DUPLICATION - COPY MASTER
ERASE
EEPROM ?
YES
NO
a. To continue with copy procedure, press YES. Resident EEPROM imaging

technique data is erased and imaging technique data contained on the IC in the
MASTER socket is copied onto the IC in the EEPROM socket. Current copy
status (address locations) is updated/displayed onscreen.
b. To abort the copy procedure, press number. Any imaging technique data existing
on the IC in the EEPROM socket will remain and MASTER IC imaging technique
data will not be copied.
5. When the procedure is complete, turn power off, remove MASTER and re-install cover
panel.
5-12E
Service Manual
2-6-2 Copy EEPROM

Since the EEPROM contains all the Auto-Tech (imaging technique), set-up and calibration
data used by the system, it is strongly recommended that you make a copy (MASTER) and
store it in a safe, static-free environment. Use the following procedure to copy data from an
IC located in the EEPROM socket (U3) to an IC placed in the master socket (U26) of the
microprocessor board (A3). Any data resident on the IC in the MASTER socket will be
erased and overwritten with the entire data content of the IC in the EEPROM socket. Proceed
as follows:
1. Turn power off and remove the cover panel to access the microprocessor board.
2. Insert an EEPROM (P/N 2224361) into the MASTER socket (U26) on the
microprocessor board (A3).
3. Turn power on and access the Utility Menu by turning the key switch.
4. Press the COPY EEPROM function key. The screen will display:
ILLUSTRATION 5-8J
IC DUPLICATION - COPY EEPROM
ERASE
MASTER ?
YES
NO
a. To continue with copy procedure, press YES. Resident EEPROM technique and
calibration data is copied to the MASTER. Current copy status (address locations)
is updated / displayed on screen.
b. To abort the copy procedure, press number. Any data existing on the MASTER
will remain and EEPROM data will not be copied.
5. When the procedure is complete, turn power off, remove ICs as necessary and
re-install cover panel.
5-12F
Service Manual
2-7 Troubleshooting
The x-ray generator is equipped with built-in automatic test facilities that check for errors
each time the system is powered-on. In the event that an error is detected, a message will
be displayed onscreen accompanied by an audible signal. Error messages that appear
when taking exposures are described in the paragraph entitled Error Messages And
Descriptions in this section.
2-7-1 Power-On Error Messages And Descriptions
The following is a list of the five possible error messages that can appear on the OCP
display when the system is powered-on. These error messages indicate a hardware
(memory checksum) error. When any of these messages appear, call an authorized
service technician. Do not operate equipment until all repairs are completed.
Note: To exit this screen, turn the key switch on the OCP once.
Refer to the following descriptions for assistance in interpreting the fault code displayed
on the Operator Control Panel:
PANEL RAM Invalid checksum returned on Operator Control Panel
ERROR Board A12 RAM U4.
PANEL ROM Invalid checksum returned on Operator Control Panel
ERROR Board A12 EPROM U2.
MAIN ROM Invalid checksum returned on Microprocessor Board A3
ERROR EPROM U2.
MAIN RAM Invalid checksum returned on Microprocessor Board A3
ERROR RAM U4.
MAIN EEPROM Invalid checksum returned on Microprocessor Board A3
ERROR EEPROM U3.
5-12G
Service Manual
2-7-2 Error Log

An error log that contains a chronological listing of up to 50 error messages (beginning
with the most recent error) is retained by the system. Each error is displayed with the
fault code and, if the internal printer option is installed, the time and date the fault
occurred. To access the error log, proceed as follows:
1. First access the Utility Menu (see Figure 5-8A) by turning the key switch once from
the operating mode menu.
2. Press the TEST function key to access the Test Menu (Figure 5-8B).
3. From the TEST Menu, press the ERRORS function key to access the Error Log,
shown below:
ILLUSTRATION 5-8K
ERROR LOG DISPLAY FAULT CODE TIME DATE
ERROR_LOG
HYFOB 10:04 3 / 01 / 95
HYFOB 05:16 3 / 01 / 95
BUCKY 20:32 2 / 12 / 95
TOMO 11:02 2 / 11 / 95
HYFOB 06:44 2 / 09 / 95
NO M A 16:04 2 / 07 / 95
FA UL T 00:19 2 / 07 / 95
HYFOB 13:22 2 / 06 / 95
NO M A 23:16 2 / 05 / 95
FA UL T 20:48 2 / 04 / 95
NO M A 19:05 2 / 04 / 95
HYFOB 11:34 2 / 04 / 95
BU CK Y 10:41 2 / 01 / 95
HYFOB 02:12 1 / 10 / 95
HYFOB 11:05 1 / 05 / 95
The error log can be scrolled up or down using the single and double arrow keys located
on the operator control panel, as shown in the figure below. Selecting the single up or
down arrow scrolls the list one line up or down, respectively, at a time. Selecting the
double up or down arrow scrolls the list 10 lines up or down, respectively, at a time. To
return back to the Utility Menu, turn the key switch once.
ILLUSTRATION 5-8J DOUBLE
ERROR LOG SCROLLING KEYS SINGLE ARROW
KEYS ARROW KEYS
5-12H
Service Manual
2-8 High Speed Starter Control Board Replacement

When replacing the High Speed Starter Control Board (P/N 2213410) it will be necessary
to adjust/verify Dip switch settings.
The times for each DIP switch setting are indicated on the printed circuit board. Proceed
as follows to set the required boost and brake times:
1. Turn power off to the generator.
2. Verify that DIP switches SW1-1 through -5 and SW2-1 through -5 are set for the
correct high-speed and low-speed boost times, respectively, for the tube being used.
(Varian tubes are identified by a circular label located on the tube end cap; Toshiba
tubes have a rectangular label located on the tube housing.) Refer to Table 5-1 for
typical boost and brake times as you set the DIP switches.
TABLE 5-1
BOOST AND BRAKE TIMES FOR BXT-14100 TUBE
Low-Speed High-Speed
Toshiba Varian Toshiba Varian
Boost Time (sec.) 1.0 0.5 2.5 1.5
Brake Time (sec.) 3 3 4 4
DIP switch (SW1 or SW2) settings for high-speed and low-speed boost times,
respectively, are made as follows:
Switches 1 through 5 on DIP switches SW1 and SW2 are marked with boost times of
0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, and 4.0 seconds, respectively.
For example, if the desired high-speed boost time is 1.75 seconds, add the times
required to total 1.75 seconds. This means that the switches for 1.0, 0.5, and 0.25
seconds would be turned to the ON position, that is, SW1-3, SW1-2, and SW1-1
would be turned ON (1.0 + 0.5 + 0.25 = 1.75 seconds). Low-speed DIP switch SW2 is
set in the same manner as described in this example.
Verify that at least one of the boost switches, 1 through 5, and one of
CAUTION the brake switches, 6 through 8, are in the ON position or the
controller will remain in the boost cycle and/or brake cycle until the
back-up time-out of 10 seconds is reached.
3. Verify that DIP switches SW1-6 through -8 and SW2-6 through -8 are set for the
proper high-speed and low-speed brake times, respectively, for the tube being used.
DIP switch (SW1 or SW2) settings for high-speed and low-speed brake times are set
similarly to setting boost times, except that the times for switches 6 through 8 on SW1
and SW2 are marked with times of 1.0, 2.0, and 4.0 seconds, respectively. Therefore,
for a 3 second high-speed brake time, SW1-6 and SW1-7 are both turned ON and for
a brake time of 7 seconds, SW1-6, SW1-7, and SW1-8 are all turned ON. Low-speed
DIP switch SW2 is set in the same manner as described in this example.
4. Turn power to the generator on.
5. On the High Speed Starter Control Board connect a DC voltmeter and measure
voltages as follows:
a. 0.50.1 volts at U19-4 (adjust R43 if not within range).
b. 1.0 0.1 volts at U19-6 (adjust R44 if not within range).
c. 0.250.05 volts at U19-8 (adjust R45 if not within range).
d. 0.250.05 volts at U19-10 (adjust R46 if not within range).
5-12I
Service Manual
6. Press the PREP key. The operator should hear the rotor anode spin up to high speed
and remain there until the PREP key is released, at which time the anode should
brake.
Note: The anode does not have to stop completely. Typically, it should be brought to under
4000 RPM in less than 8 seconds. Refer to tube manufacturers
recommendations.
2-8-1 Boost, Run and Brake Voltage Checks

Connect a voltmeter to DIN Rail A13 rotor cable terminals as indicated below. Press
PREP, and verify the following boost, run and brake voltages:
Note: Do not use 25S or 200L mA stations for this test.
1. Boost:
410 - 470 VAC A13 Pin 7 to Pin 9 (Varian tubes)*
220 - 250 VAC A13 Pin 7 to Pin 9 (Toshiba tubes)*
2. Run:
90 - 110 VAC A13 Pin 7 to Pin 9
3. Brake:
75 - 95 VDC A13 Pin 7 to Pin 9 (Varian tubes)*
69 - 89 VDC A13 Pin 7 to Pin 9 (Toshiba tubes)*
0 VDC A13 Pin 8 to Pin 9
*Varian tubes are identified by a circular label located on tube end cap.
Toshiba tubes are identified by a rectangular label located on the tube housing.
5-12J
Service Manual
2-9 Theory Of Operation

2-9-1 Overview
This section provides a detailed theory of operation from a system block level to an
individual circuit level.
The center of the system is the Microprocessor Printed Circuit Board, A3. It controls all
system operations, including the serial interface with the Operator Control Panel (OCP),
MA selection, KVP control, timing functions, and built-in diagnostics. Please refer to
Illustration 9-5, Silhouette HF X-Ray Generator Block Diagram for a representation of
the systems circuitry.
2-9-2 Introduction
The Silhouette HF x-ray generators are available in a single-phase input model and a
three-phase input model. The single-phase model can be configured with a Stored Energy
Source, SES, allowing for connection to a standard 110 VAC power source.
Since all models utilize identical x-ray control electronics, the text and drawings will
refer to the Silhouette HF Series and address specific model differences only where
applicable. For a detailed component listing, please refer to Table 7-1, Silhouette HF:
Replaceable Parts, located in Chapter 7. This table provides a parts listing (replaceable
parts only) for each Silhouette HF model, allowing you to see which components are
used with each model and system option.
2-9-2-1 Power Input And Control
Input power is applied to the power shut off circuit (A9) through a magnetic circuit
breaker. When the remote power switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) is closed,
power is applied to transformer T1. The power shut off contains a relay latch device that
applies and disconnects power to transformer (T1). When the system has not been used
for 60 minutes, and the automatic shut-off feature is not disabled, the microprocessor
sends a shutoff signal to the power shut off, which latches a relay open, disconnecting
input power from the transformer. The latch can be reset by setting the remote power
switch or main circuit breaker off and then on. One-minute prior to automatic shut-off
being activated, the microprocessor will transmit a signal that will cause an audible tone
to be generated and display the message PRESS ANY KEY on the OCP. If any activity
is detected, the shutoff signal will not be transmitted and the relay latch will remain
closed. In addition, the power shut off circuit has an internal 30 VDC power supply that
provides power for the 30 VDC magnets as long as AC power is applied to the unit and
the main circuit breaker is on.
5-13
TUBE HOUSING
24 VAC REV 7
SOURCE
220 VAC
CHARGER
33 VAC (SE only)

SWITCHED VAC REGULATED STORED ENERGY
ILLUSTRATION 5-9
15 VAC POWER SOURCE
30 VDC MAGNETS
TRANSFORMER
SUPPLY
10.5 VAC
DISTRIBUTION (SE only)
BOARD
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
SHUTOFF
POWER
8.5 VAC
24 VAC
SHUT OFF
LINE IN
CURRENT ANODE
Silhouette HF X-Ray Generator Block Diagram
REMOTE AMP HV TANK

ON/OFF (ANODE) X-RAY TUBE
HF BUS
KVP AND
SERIAL CONTROL COLLIMATOR
INTERFACE (ANODE)
BOARD
24 VAC
DB-9 SERIAL CAB LE POWER PROTECTION

TO OCP
5-14
AND CONTROL
AEC (BACKUP CONTACTOR)

OPTION
MICROPROCESSOR
KVP CURRENT
CONTROL AMP
HF BUS
(CATHODE)
CATHODE
(CATHODE)
HV TANK
HF BUS
FILAMENT
CONTROL
REGULATOR
POWER AND
INTERFACE CONTROL
CONTROL
DOOR INTERLOCK PBL
Service Manual
SILHOUETTE HF
DIRECTION 2127416-100
Service Manual
2-9-2-2 Transformer
Switched VAC is applied to transformer (T1) via the power shut off circuit. Power is
stepped up or down (according to system configuration) and applied to the following
circuits:
24 and 8.5 VAC to microprocessor
33, 15 and 10.5 VAC to regulated power supply circuit
220 VAC to source charger (if equipped)
24 VAC to tube housing assembly for collimator
50, 120 and 220 VAC to the interface board; 50 and 220 VAC are used to power the
rotor in the x-ray tube; 120 VAC is used to power optional buckies
2-9-2-3 Power Protection/Control
This circuit is comprised of relay switching devices (back-up contactors) that isolate
either D.C. or SES input power from current amp input circuits. In addition, current amp
output is isolated from the HV tank circuits. Microprocessor signal CONT 24 VDC
energizes relays during the EXPOSE cycle. K1 provides current amp output isolation; K2
provides current amp input isolation (K2 and K3 are used for input isolation in 6000SE
models).
2-9-2-4 Regulated Power Supply
33, 15 and 10.5 VAC are applied to the Regulated Power Supply (A2). Regulated +/-15
VDC and +50 VDC is distributed to KVP Control, Filament Control (resistor circuit),
Source Charger or Line Voltage Monitor as required.
2-9-2-5 Main Microprocessor
The main microprocessor circuit (A3) provides control and indication for all system
functions and input/output (I/O) devices. Operator interface is accomplished through the
OCP which provides pushbutton keys for input, and a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for status indication. A data bus (HFD) provides control
address and data between the microprocessor and KVP Control, Filament Control, and
optional AEC circuits. The microprocessor also controls the following functions:
Interface Control (A1) and ATM (when the ATM option is installed) I/O functions, the
Power Protection/Control circuit for all isolated high voltage I/O functions, MA
selection, timing functions, and built-in diagnostics. In normal operation, the
microprocessor is operating in an executive program mode, polling the OCP serial
interface port to see if any buttons are pressed. When a key operation is sensed, it
switches over to the program called for by that key. When the program ends, the
microprocessor returns to the executive polling routine.
2-9-2-6 KVP Control
There are two separate circuits for cathode and anode control. KV level data is
transmitted to the KVP Control circuits (A4 and A8) over the HF bus. An active feedback
loop transmits a voltage level that is proportional to actual high voltage from the HV
tanks back to the KVP Control circuits. KVP Control increases or decreases the output to
the current amp circuits to precisely control the output KVP. If the appropriate
corrections to the kVp output are not detected, exposure is automatically terminated and a
KVP error message is displayed on the OCP.
2-9-2-7 Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) (Optional)
The AEC (A10) terminates exposure (when operating in AEC mode) by detecting the
x-ray energy that passes through the body. When the x-ray energy on the detector reaches
the required amount, the exposure is terminated by an /EXPSTOP signal sent to the KVP
Control circuits. The microprocessor also senses this signal to stop the exposure.
5-15
Service Manual
2-9-2-8 Current Amp

Current amplifier I/O is controlled by Power Protection/Control circuits. There are two
separate current amplifier circuits for cathode and anode inputs. Inputs from the KVP
Control are transmitted to current amp circuits via the Distribution Control (A7).
Amplified 100 kHz current is sent to high voltage tanks through back-up contactors.
2-9-2-9 Filament Control Regulator
Filament current is regulated by the high-frequency Filament Control Regulator (A5).
Data is transmitted between the microprocessor circuit and filament control circuit via the
HF Bus. Filament current is controlled by the microprocessor reference voltage and
limited by filament resistor circuit (A6). The filament current is switched on A5 and is
routed through A6 and A28 to the small or large filament of the x-ray tube.
2-9-2-10 Interface Control
The Interface Control Circuit (A1) receives data and control from the microprocessor
circuit. MA signals are sensed from the anode high voltage tank and transmitted to the
microprocessor. Bucky and rotor control signals generated by the microprocessor are sent
to the appropriate device via the Interconnect Panel (A13). In addition, the door interlock
circuit and Positive Beam Limitation (PBL) circuit are connected to the Interface Control,
sending /DOOR and /PBL signals to the microprocessor. When these signals are active,
they indicate to the microprocessor that a door is open or that the collimator is not in a
PBL condition, respectively.
2-9-2-11 High Voltage Tanks
There are two separate high voltage tanks for the cathode and anode. These tanks
generate high voltages according to x-ray generator technique inputs for use by the x-ray
tube. Actual output is monitored and controlled by an active feedback loop to the KVP
Control circuits.
2-9-2-12 Stored Energy Source
When the SES configuration is selected, Source Charger(s) A11 (and A14) are added to
the system in addition to the Stored Energy Source itself. This configuration lowers the
required input power from 220 VAC, 100-amp to 115 VAC, 15-amp. Power required for
current amplifiers is supplied from the SES, where the SES is replenished by the Source
Chargers.
2-9-2-13 High Speed Starter
The High Speed Starter is used on 50 kW systems only. The function of the High Speed
Starter is to drive 3" rotating-anode motors of the x-ray tube. The Controller is selectable
to perform both low and high speed motor starts. The high speed boost signal is 450
VAC, 180 Hz, driving the rotors to 10,000 RPM in 1-1/2 seconds or less; the low speed
boost signal is 300 VAC, 60 Hz, driving the rotors to 3450 RPM in approximately
one-half second.
Rapid starting is achieved by applying a high voltage drive signal within the tube
manufacturers specifications to the rotor for maximum acceleration. During x-ray the
rotor drive voltage is reduced to 100 VAC which is sufficient to maintain the anodes
speed. At the end of x-ray, a 75-95 VDC voltage (duration also digitally selectable) is
applied to the motor dynamically braking it for approximately three seconds for low
speed operation and four seconds for high speed operation. Both the boost and brake
durations are digitally selectable with DIP switches.
The Control Board (Controller) 208134 monitors rotor currents to insure that the rotor is
spinning before an x-ray is taken. It also provides over-current protection in case of a
short circuit (for example, in the tube, the wiring, etc.). If the Control Board detects an
excessive amount of stator current, the circuitry instantly shuts off the controller and
inhibits operation for 10 seconds. In both cases, the main microprocessor is notified of
correct or incorrect status of the rotor currents via the ROTOR RUNNING signal,
described below.
5-16
Service Manual
Interface
Connector J2 interfaces the Controller to the Interface Board, 208117. There are four
signals and ground on this connector. The Main Microprocessor, 208116 (A3) and the
Controller each generate two signals. The four signals and their functions are:
Main Microprocessor Signals (to the Controller):
/HS (HIGH SPEED SELECT): This signal is active low. The main microprocessor drives
this signal low to place the Controller in high speed mode (10,000 RPM operation), or
high to place the Controller in low speed mode (3450 RPM operation).
/START SIGNAL: This signal is active low. When driven low by the main
microprocessor, the boost cycle of the Controller is initiated. After the boost cycle is
completed, the run cycle starts if the /START SIGNAL is still active. The run cycle
continues until the /START SIGNAL is driven inactive, at which time the brake cycle is
initiated. If the /START SIGNAL is driven inactive during the boost cycle, the boost
cycle will continue until its set completion time, after which the brake cycle will initiate.
Controller Signals (to the Main Microprocessor):
ROTOR RUNNING: This signal is active high. It is driven high by the Controller at the
end of the boost cycle, indicating that proper running currents are detected in the rotor. It
remains high for the duration of the run and brake cycles.
HIGH SPEED RUNNING: This signal is active high. It is driven high by the Controller
simultaneously with ROTOR RUNNING if high speed (180 Hz) current pulses are
detected (as opposed to 60 Hz low speed pulses), confirming high speed operation.
2-9-3 Detailed Circuit Theory
The following component descriptions detail signal flow for each circuit. It is suggested
that you refer to Chapter 8, Schematics for the corresponding component schematic
diagram as you review this section.
2-9-3-1 Operator Control Panel, E10150 (A12)
The Operator Control Panel (OCP) contains a liquid crystal display (LCD) and most of
the control switches and indicator lights for operator interface. This includes 10 LEDs, a
41 key membrane keypad, a remote power on/off switch, a key switch, and an optional 40
character line printer.
The OCP is controlled by the Front Panel Display Board, 208113 (A12A1); the Front
Panel Display Board is controlled by microprocessor, U1. Communication between the
OCP and the main microprocessor is via a serial I/O port consisting of an Asynchronous
Communications Interface Adapter (ACIA), U8, driver chip, U7, and J1, a DB-9
connector. Peripheral Interface Adapter (PIA), U5, interfaces the microprocessor to the
keyboard, LEDs, and the audio indicator, and PIA, U16, to the 40 and 80 column
printers. The real time clock/calendar (RTC) chip (supplied with the internal printer
option), U24, is directly connected to the microprocessor data bus and controlled through
gates U15 and U21. An address decoder chip, U3, generates the enable signals for the
RAM, ACIA, PIAs, RTC, and LCD. The Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
(EPROM), U2, is a non-volatile memory chip which stores the program which the main
microprocessor executes. The Random Access memory (RAM), U4 is a scratch pad
memory chip used by the microprocessor in executing its program.
Key Switches
The front panel keys and key switch are organized as a row and column matrix consisting
of eight rows and five columns. In the executive program the microprocessor
continually scans all eight rows, each in sequence, until a key switch is pressed, at which
time an action is taken. The microprocessor selects a row by applying a binary code to
pins 10 - 17 of U5. This code is all 1s except for the row which is selected, which is a
0". This 0" selects a single, unique row of switches. If a key is pressed in the selected
row, one of the column input lines, U5 pins 2 - 7, to which the key is connected is pulled
low. The microprocessor senses this low level. Since the microprocessor knows both the
5-17
Service Manual
row and column of the pressed switch, it can decode which key it is and take proper
action.
EXPOSE Switch
The x-ray EXPOSE switch signal is buffered by U7 and routed to J1, the serial DB-9
connector, which connects the OCP to the main microprocessor via the serial interface
cable. This switch indicates the closure of the EXPOSE switch and is used for the Dead
Man switch function of the EXPOSE key. Whenever the EXPOSE key is released, this
signal opens the backup contactor. In normal operation, the exposure is completed before
EXPOSE is released so the contactor is not switching any signals.
LED Indicators
The LEDs are mounted on the Instrument Panel Aseembly, 102499. They are controlled
by U5s eight keyboard scan outputs, plus pins 8 and 9. The eight keyboard scan outputs
are multiplexed with driving the LEDs. The LEDs are disabled (Q1 turned off) for the
short keyboard scan pulses, and enabled the remainder of the time. When enabled, the ten
outputs driving the LEDs are a 0" for an on" condition and a 1" for an off"
condition.
Q2 is used to control the EXPOSE LED (D8). This LED is only illuminated when the
following two conditions are met: the EXPOSE button is depressed and the
microprocessor specifically selects the EXPOSE LED. The x-ray contactor is similarly
controlled, thus yielding redundant hardware and software control of the x-ray radiation.
The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) is connected to the microprocessor data bus through
J2. LCD data transfer is controlled by the signals gated in U14 and U23, which include
the LCD enable signal and the two read/write lines. The address line A0 controls which
register in the LCD data is written to or read from. The vertical viewing angle of the LCD
can be controlled by adjusting R10, which applies a bias voltage to J2 pin 4. The LCD is
back-lit by a cold cathode lighting unit mounted to the rear of the LCD.
Printer Interfaces
The Printer Interface Adapter, U16, is the interface IC for the optional 40 and 80 column
printers. It controls the 40 column printers solenoids, buffered through driver ICs U18,
U19, and U20, and connected to the printer via connector J6. U22 is the input buffer IC
for the printers motor speed and head position sensing outputs from connector J7. U24,
the real time clock/calendar (RTC) chip, is directly connected to the microprocessor data
bus and controlled through gates U15 and U21. The 80 column printers DATA output
and BUSY input from and to PIA2, are buffered through the serial line driver IC, U7.
Watchdog Timer
U6 is known as a Watchdog Timer chip. It is continually strobed by the
microprocessor while executing the executive program. Should the microprocessor
software execution ever fail due to conditions such as external noise spikes, U6 will
generate a reset pulse to the microprocessor.
5-18
Service Manual
2-9-3-2 Main Microprocessor, 208116 (A3)

The main microprocessor board controls all functions of the high frequency generator and
supplies 5 volts to all other circuitry. Connector J2 connects to the Serial Interface
Board, 208112 (A15). This board contains the serial interface integrated circuit chip, U1,
which provides communication between the main microprocessor and the front panels
microprocessor.
8.5 VAC is applied to J1 pin 10 and 11, which connects to the bridge rectifier, D1. The
output of the bridge rectifier is filtered by C41 and C1 and connected to +5 volt regulator,
U22. The output of U22 is further filtered by C3 and provides +5 volts for the whole
system, except the front panel. The front panel +5 volts is regulated by U32.
24 VAC is applied to J1 pins 5 and 6 and connected to D9 through D12. The voltage at
this point is filtered by C8 and connects to a 24 volt regulator U16. The output of U16 is
filtered by C11 and provides +24 VDC. This voltage is connected to U17 and to J6 pin 2.
U17 is a +15 volt regulator. The output is filtered by C12 and is the source for +15 VDC
used by circuits on the microprocessor board.
U1 is an 8-bit microprocessor. C5, C6 and Y1 connect to the microprocessor forming a
3.58 MHz clock. This clock is divided by four and appears at U1 pins 34 and 35 as a
2-phase system clock, E and Q. These two signals control all data transfer timing. The
microprocessor communicates with the other circuits on the board through an address
bus, U1 pins 8-23, and a data bus, U1 pins 24-31. The microprocessor is started by a reset
circuit consisting of R10, D7 and C27. This circuit holds U1 pin 37 low after power is
applied for about a 1/4 second enabling all power supplies to achieve a stabilized voltage
before the microprocessor starts running its program.
The four high address lines, A12-15, are connected to the address decoder, U8. This chip
selects the appropriate PIA, DAC, EEPROM, EPROM, LCD or RAM chips that the
microprocessor needs to address. For example, if the microprocessor is going to write
data into U4 (RAM), A12-15 will be at a low level and the address of the location in
RAM will appear on the address lines A0-10. U8 pin 15 will be at a low level enabling
U4. At this time, the microprocessor provides the appropriate data to the data bus and
pulls U1 pin 32 (READ/WRITE) low. This line, together with the E clock signal,
generate a write enable pulse on U11 pin 11, which writes the data into RAM at the
address specified on the address bus.
The RAM, U4, is a Random Access Memory used by the microprocessor for all
calculations. It contains 2,048 8-bit words. All data in U4 is erased each time the power
is turned off. New data is written into and read out of U4 by the microprocessor while
programs are running.
The EPROM, U2, is an Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory consisting of 32,768
8-bit words which contain all of the program instructions for the operation of the unit as
well as the tube limits for the particular x-ray tube being used. Therefore, whenever
changing this circuit board, be sure that the replacement board has an EPROM which has
been programmed for the same x-ray tube or use the EPROM from the board being
replaced. Data in U2 is programmed only at the factory and remains when power is
turned off.
The EEPROM, U3, is an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory which
is used by the system for storage of all Auto-Tech data, set up data, and calibration data.
It is necessary, therefore, that U3 be kept with the system and used if the A3 circuit board
is replaced since all of the calibration data for the system is stored in this PROM. U3 also
stores a total count of exposures and the parameters of the last exposure, allowing the
system to return to the parameters of the last exposure when powered on. This circuit can
be written to by the microprocessor.
U15 is a voltage sensing circuit that inhibits writing to the EEPROM during power on
and power off.
A second EEPROM (MASTER) can be placed in the U26 socket to enable the
microprocessor to make a duplicate copy of U3. A master EEPROM can also be copied
5-19
Service Manual
into U3 by the microprocessor. A master copy should be removed from the

microprocessor and stored in a safe static-free place.
Note: Calibration data will not be copied into U3 from an EEPROM placed in the master
socket.
Peripheral Interface Adapters (PIAs), U5-U7, are used to connect the microprocessor to
the rest of the system. U5, which is the Front Panel Interface (FPI), connects to the front
panel and is used for scanning the keys and updating the LEDs. It also interfaces to the
optional automatic thickness measuring system (ATM) and provides the control signals
for PREP, the audible signal and the back-up contactor. U6 interfaces to the
digital-to-analog converters, U24 and U25, and contains the data lines for the HF data bus
and the control signal for the timed automatic power- off. U7 provides the EXPOSE
signal, the three select signals for the HF data bus and all of the signals to the Interface
Board, (A1) (rotor, bucky, tube mA SENSE and Interlocks).
U20, U21, and U24 form a successive approximation digital-to-analog converter. D8 is a
zener diode reference which supplies 6.2 volts through R15 to op amp U20. R17 is used
to adjust the output of U20 pin 14 (TP1) to -10.2 VDC, which is the reference for the
digital-to-analog converter, U24 and U25, and the HF data bus. VSENSE J1 pin 12 is
applied to voltage divider R57 and R19 and filtered by C26. This is buffered by U21 and
applied to U24 pin 9. The microprocessor controls U24 through the data bus,
successively trying different codes until it finds the code that provides the portion of
VREF (U24 pin 8) that is equal in magnitude to the voltage at U24 pin 9. This code is
used by the microprocessor to calculate the source voltage.
D/A-2, U25 is a digital-to-analog converter which is used as a reference voltage for the
AEC Board (A10). This reference is varied as required, based on kVp, mA, and film
screen combination.
The microprocessor controls the x-ray by the issuance of the EXPOSE signal to the kVp
control circuit. This signal is a logic high during x-ray and a logic low otherwise. In
addition to the EXPOSE signal, a second signal is required for the kVp control circuit to
produce an exposure. Normally at a rate of 400 Hz, the microprocessor produces a pulsed
signal which triggers a one-shot on the kVp board. The presence of this signal is required
for the kVp control board to provide an output for the current amplifiers to produce the
high voltage drive. Should the microprocessor board or software fail while the EXPOSE
signal is high, this pulsed signal would also cease to be generated since it is generated by
the software. In the event of any microprocessor malfunction, the exposure will be
terminated.
This system is additionally backed up by the operators ability to intervene by releasing
the EXPOSE switch. In addition to the switch being constantly monitored during
exposure (every 2.5 milliseconds), there is a second circuit which is hardware activated
independently of the software. Releasing the EXPOSE button will terminate the x-ray by
the software and open up the backup contactor, K2.
Before taking an exposure, the backup contactors, K1, K2 are turned on. This is done by
U5 pin 13 going high causing the output of the driver U10 pin 17 to go low. If at the
same time Q2 is on, then the back-up contactors are enabled. Q2 is turned on by J3 pin 11
being low, indicating that the EXPOSE switch is held down causing U13 pin 13 to be
low, U10 pin 4 to be high and U10 pin 15 to be low.
The microprocessor communicates to the other circuits (ie., kVp control board and
filament control board, through the HF data bus). This is a bi-directional 8-bit bus used
for control as well as data transfer to and from the high frequency control circuits. It is
also used to check the status of these circuits to ensure reliable, repeatable x-rays.
2-9-3-3 Interface Boards (A1)
For Silhouette HF Systems with Single-Phase Input
The interface board connects the microprocessor to all of the high voltage circuits,
including the rotor and bucky controls.
5-20
Service Manual
J1 pin 12 controls the bucky. If J1 pin 12 (BUCKY 1 TABLE) is high, U3 pin 2 goes
high causing U3 pin 17 to go low, turning on Relay 2 and applying 120 VAC to J3 pin 5,
which turns on Bucky 1. When the bucky is in position for an x-ray to begin, the bucky
applies 120 VAC to J3 pin 6. This voltage is connected to R31, R45, CR22 and
photocoupler U10. U10 then turns on, causing U10 pin 4 to be a high. The high level
goes to J1 pin 14 (BUCKYRDY). This tells the microprocessor to start an exposure. J1
pin 13 (BUCKY 2 WALL) functions in the same manner.
J2 pin 1 and J2 pin 2 are connected across M1 and M2 on the high voltage transformer.
This is a current sense signal sensing the current in the x-ray tube. Any current flowing
through the secondary winding of the transformer passes through R22 and U4. When a
current flows, U4 turns on applying a low level to J1 pin 5 (XRAYON). This indicates to
the microprocessor that current is flowing through the x-ray tube. If no current is sensed
by this circuit during an x-ray exposure, an indication (NO MA?) is made on the LCD.
D11-14 are used to limit the voltage across U4.
The rest of the circuitry on the interface board concerns the x-ray tube rotor control. At
the beginning of the PREP cycle, J1 pin 10 (R50) and J1 pin 15 (R220) are both high.
When R220 goes high at the start of PREP, the microprocessor is directing the rotor
starter circuit to go into the high speed start mode (220 VAC applied to the rotor) causing
U3 pin 12 to go low, causing U3 pin 8 to be low. R19 and C10 form a 2-second time
delay such that U3 pin 8 would go high after 2 seconds even if R220 remained high. At
the start of PREP, U3 pin 8 being low causes U3 pin 14 to be low turning on optocoupler
U9 and also keeping U3 pin 4 low and optocoupler U8 off. U9 being on turns on triac Q5
applying 220 VAC to J3 pin 10, which is the rotor common line. The rotor is connected
between J3 pin 10 and J3 pins 8 and 9. Rotor current flows through R28-30 to the 0 VAC
return. R28 senses the current in the phase shift winding and R29 and R30 sense the
current in the main winding. If the rotor is working, the voltage across these current sense
resistors appears on CR21 and CR20, which detects the voltage and turns on optocouplers
U6 and U7. Then Q4 turns on, producing a low level on J1 pin 9 (ROTOR). If either of
these currents is not present, J1 pin 9 stays high, indicating to the microprocessor that
there is no rotor current and preventing an exposure.
After 1 1/2 seconds, the microprocessor will pull R220 low indicating that it is time to
apply 50 VAC to the rotor, which is the run condition. When R220 goes low, U3 pin 12
goes high, U3 pin 11 goes low and U3 pin 14 goes high, turning off U9. When U9 turns
off, Q5 turns off and there is no voltage applied to the rotor. R13, R14, and C9 form a
time delay of about 1/4 second, after which time U3 pin 4 goes high causing U3 pin 15 to
go low causing U8 to turn on. U8 turning on turns on triac Q6 applying 50 VAC to the
rotor. This condition is sustained until the operator releases PREP and EXPOSE, causing
R50 to go low at which point triac Q6 turns off.
U2 is a 12 volt regulator. +24 VDC comes in on J1 pin 2 and is connected to U2. The
output of U2 (+12 VDC) is supplied to optocouplers U8 and U9.
In addition, the interface board connects the door interlock and PBL circuits to the
microprocessor. TB1 pins 1 and 2 are connected through normally closed door interlock
circuits. When the circuit is opened (door open) J1 pin 6 (DOOR) becomes active (high),
indicating to the microprocessor that the door is open. TB1 pins 3 and 4 are connected to
normally closed collimator contacts. When the collimator is not in a PBL condition, the
circuit opens, generating an active PBL signal (high) at J1 pin 8, indicating to the
microprocessor that PBL is not active.
For Silhouette HF Systems with Three-Phase Input
On all three-phase input systems, the 208117 Interface Board is used in place of the
208067. The 208117 board has two additional circuits, with all other functions being
identical. The first circuit senses if all three input phases are present. If any one of the
phases is not present, a phase error would be indicated when PREP is pushed. This circuit
works as follows: J4 pins 1, 5, and 6 connect to the three input phases from the
transformer, T1. The voltage across each phase is monitored by optocouplers, U11, U12,
and U13 in series with resistors R11, R16, and R15, respectively. Diodes D6, D16 and
D7 provide protection for the optocouplers. The outputs of the three optocouplers are
5-21
Service Manual
rectified and filtered by D5 and C8 and control Q1. Normally, Q1 is off, leaving J1 pin 7
high. If a phase is missing, the voltage on C8 will rise, turning on Q1 and holding the
phase output J1 pin 7 low.
The second circuit and its associated circuitry, interfaces the Silhouette HF to a high
speed starter. It works as follows: the R220 signal from J1 pin 15 is buffered and inverted
by U3. Output U3 pin 12 is connected to J5 pin 2 and is called the /HIGH SPEED SEL
signal. When low, this signal indicates to the starter to run in high speed mode. The other
output is the START SIG at J5 pin 3, which is the buffered R50 signal. It is the
command signal to the high speed starter to begin the BOOST-RUN-BRAKE cycle of the
rotor motor. The two inputs from the starter are ROTOR RUNNING at J5 pin 6 and HI
SPEED RUNNING at J5 pin 1. These signals are derived from current sensing
transformers on the rotors main and phase windings. The ROTOR RUNNING signal
being high means that the motor is connected and being driven properly. The HI SPEED
RUNNING signal supplements the ROTOR RUNNING signal and indicates that the
driving currents are at the high speed rate of 180 Hz, as opposed to 60 Hz for low speed.
2-9-3-4 Regulated Power Supply, 208084 (A2)
The regulated power supply provides +15 VDC, -15 VDC, and the Filament Voltage
Supply for the system.
The circuit is comprised of full wave bridge rectifiers, a -15 volt 3-terminal regulator,
pulse width modulators and FETs.
Since the Filament Voltage Supply and +15 VDC circuits are identical capacitive input
boost switching supplies, only the +15 VDC circuit is discussed.
+ 15 VDC Circuit Description
10.5 VAC is connected to DB1 through transformer T1, into terminals E1 and E2. 10.5
VAC is full wave rectified and filtered by C1, providing 13 VDC across C1 which is
connected to inductor L1. L1 is connected to a parallel pair of FETS, Q1 and Q2 which
are a pulse width modulated switch connected to ground. This switch causes bursts of
current to flow through L1. The current bursts in L1 create a voltage greater than the
input voltage that is peak detected in D1 and smoothed by capacitor C3. C2 and R1 are
configured as a snubber network to limit spikes and transients. The voltage on C3 is
sensed by resistor network R6, R7 and R8 and fed back to pulse width modulator U1
(error amp inputs, pins 1 and 16). The voltage at pin 1 is compared with the reference
voltage at U1 pin 2 and varies the pulse width of the switching signal at U1 pin 9. U1 pin
9 is connected to the gates of Q1 and Q2 and controls the switching waveform. The rate
of the switching pulses is controlled by the RC time constant of C5 and R12 connected to
U1 pins 5 and 6. R7 is used to adjust the output voltage.
- 15 VDC Circuit Description
15 VAC is connected through J1 pins 4 and 2 to a diode bridge composed of D3 - D6.
The output of the bridge (-21 VDC) is filtered by C11 and connected to voltage regulator
U3. The output of U3 supplies -15 VDC.
2-9-3-5 KVP Control Board, 208089 (A4, A8)
When an EXPOSE signal is received to begin x-ray, backup contactors (K1 through K4)
are turned on and power is applied to the bucky, if a bucky has been selected. The
filament current and x-ray power supply voltage are checked before the exposure signal
can be transmitted. All switching is accomplished via solid state controls. Timing is
accomplished from the microprocessor control via quartz crystal reference. The system
operates in a fail-safe mode since the microprocessor is controlling the EXPOSE signal
and in addition pulsing a second signal at a 400 Hz rate. In the event of a malfunction
during exposure, this pulsed signal would cease and the EXPOSURE signal would be
terminated. Output kVp is selected by the microprocessor prior to the start of x-ray. Data
is loaded into the kVp digital to analog converter on A4 and A8.
The following discussion will focus on only one system since the anode and cathode
transformers are controlled separately and identically.
5-22
Service Manual
The accuracy of the output voltage to the x-ray tube is accomplished with the high
frequency feedback power supply. A KV voltage divider circuit is built into each High
Voltage transformer assembly. The KV output is sampled by this divider and compared
to the required kVp. Adjustments are made to the system continually to hold the output
KV constant for all line variations expected. Operation of these circuits are as follows:
A digital code corresponding to the output kVp is sent to the digital-to-analog converter,
U1, through the HF data bus on J1. This generates a voltage at TP3 proportional to kVp.
Slope and offset pots R5 and R2, together with the adjacent resistors, form a voltage
scaling network providing the reference voltage at TP2. The actual codes necessary are
computed during the digital kVp calibration procedure.
The output of the kVp divider from the High Voltage Transformer is connected to a
buffer amplifier, which is part of U4, through the + and - sense in inputs, which are on
J2-1 and J2-2. The kVp sample at TP4 is compared to the reference voltage, TP2, in a
linear comparator, which is another part of U4. R14 - R16 and C5 form a loop gain
compensation circuit.
The output of the comparator at U4 pin 7 controls the kVp oscillator, U5, through a
current driver, Q9. The output of U5 drives a flip-flop, U6, which generates a two phase
output signal at pins 12 and 13. These clock signals trigger dual one-shots in U9, which
in turn, connects to the two drivers.
The driver consisting of U10, Q5, and Q6 is switched 180 degrees out of phase with the
driver consisting of U11, Q7, and Q8. These drivers control a FET output stage
consisting of Q1-Q4 arranged as a bridge. For one half of the cycle, Q1 and Q3 are
conducting, driving current from +15V to J2-6, through the current driver, then back into
J2-5, through Q3 to ground. For the other half cycle, current from +15V is conducting
through Q4 to J2-5 through the current amplifier in the opposite direction to J2-6 through
Q2 ground. This AC signal appears at J2-5 to J2-6 which will be amplified in A15 and
applied to the resonant circuit and then to the high voltage transformer.
These operations occur only during the exposure time. J1-1 is the EXPOSE signal, which
must be a logic high to enable both U6 and U8. If this is low, there will not be any loop
oscillator output and therefore no x-ray exposure.
U8 is a re-triggerable one shot which has to be triggered every 2.5 msec to enable U9.
This is done by the microprocessor continually setting and resetting the select lines
(SEL1, SEL2, SEL4) to a code 3". This is decoded in U2 to provide an output pulse
train at U2-12, which resets U8, thus continuously enabling the x-ray. This is done so that
if a failure should occur during x-ray, this pulse signal would cease and x-ray would
terminate.
During normal system operation, x-ray is terminated at the end of the selected time
interval by microprocessor control signals or, when the system is equipped with the
optional Automatic Exposure Control (AEC), exposure is terminated by the AEC control
sensing the level of radiation. However, x-ray can also be terminated as a result of a
malfunction. A malfunction can occur if the operator releases the EXPOSE button prior
to the end of the selected time interval. This is indicated on the control panel by the
message HYFOB?.
The sampling of kVp voltages is one example of how exposure conditions are monitored.
This is accomplished through the constant comparison of sample voltages in the High
Voltage Transformer to a reference voltage. If the sample voltage is correct, a logic low
is generated; if not, a logic high exists and x-ray is terminated. The circuitry is as follows:
the kVp sample voltage at TP4 is continuously compared with the kVp reference voltage
at TP2 in U3. If the sample voltage is correct, a logic low is generated at U3 Pin 8, which
is connected to U7, which is, in turn, read by the microprocessor every 2.5 msec.
However, should a logic high be found to exist, x-ray will be terminated. The
microprocessor detects this as a kVp error and indicates the message KVP? on the
Operator Control Panel to indicate that the problem is in the anode supply. If the problem
is in the cathode supply, the message KVP-C? will be indicated.
Generating an excessive kV would also serve to terminate exposure. Excessive kV can
be detected as follows: the + and - sense lines (J2-1 and J2-2) are connected respectively
5-23
Service Manual
to U12 pin 9 and U12 pin 2, which are configured as voltage comparators. Should the
sense voltage exceed a preset level, U12 pin 8 or pin 14 would provide a logic low which
will hold U8 pin 3 low and disable U9, thereby terminating exposure.
The AEC control can also terminate exposures. If AEC is selected, a combination of data
signals on the HF data bus and select line will set flip flop U6 pin 9 to a logic low,
enabling U7 to read the AEC EXPSTOP signal on J5 pin 4. When the AEC Board
detects the correct exposure level, the J5 pin 4 signal will be a logic low. This in turn
will cause U7 pin 11 to be at a logic low, which is connected to U8 pin 3 as well as U7
pin 9. A logic low at U8 pin 3 will disable U8, causing U8 pin 6 to stay at a logic low
and disable U9, thereby terminating exposure. With U9 disabled, U3 pin 8 will be at a
logic high, indicating a kVp error. Additionally, U7 pin 8, which is connected to the
microprocessor, will be at a logic low and therefore, will be interpreted as an AEC
EXPSTOP signal.
2-9-3-6 Filament Control Regulator, 208163 (A5)
The filament power supply is a high frequency regulated system. A digital code
proportional to the required filament current is computed by the microprocessor. The data
is applied to HFDO-HFD7 at J1 and the digital to analog converter, U2. The select
(SEL1-4) lines are set to a 1 which is decoded by U4. U4 pin 14 goes low strobing the
data into U2. The reference thus appears on U3 pin 14 and TP3 as a voltage between 0
and -5 volts, depending on the filament current required. An offset voltage determined by
R26-R28 is summed with this reference and inverted, generating at TP1 a final reference
voltage for the filament feedback. The voltage at TP1 passes through a voltage divider,
R31, R25 and R41 and is applied to U1 pin 2.
U1 is a pulse width modulated power supply control circuit. The output of this circuit at
U1 pin 11 and U1 pin 8 controls the invertor transistors Q5 and Q6 (and Q8 and Q9 on
208163 boards), which in turn, control the output amplifier Q1-Q4.
The output amplifier is configured as a bridge circuit. The primary of the filament
transformer is connected in parallel with R24 through J2 pins 4 and 6 or 5 and 6,
depending on whether the small or large filament is activated. This output amplifier
provides a balanced AC voltage to the filament transformer.
When U1 pin 11 is low, Q2 and Q4 are on, so current flows from the VCC (50 Volt)
power supply through Q4, through the filament transformer, through Q2 and then through
the current sense resistors R12 and R13. When U1 pin 8 is low, current flows through
Q1, the filament transformer in the opposite direction, Q3, and R12 and R13.
The voltage across R12 and R13 is proportional to the filament current. This signal is
filtered by R11 and C15. The filtered voltage is connected to U1 pin 1 and compared to
the reference described above. U1 controls the pulse width of the output to control the
filament current.
One section of U3 senses whether the filament circuit is in regulation and causes the
output at U3-7 to be at a logic low. The microprocessor reads the output at U3-7 through
buffer U6. This buffer is enabled when the select lines are set at a code of 3, causing
U4-12 to be at a logic low.
U5 monitors the sense current through R33. It compares this to the maximum current
allowed in the tube which is set at the factory using R36. If the maximum current is
exceeded (U5 pin 1 goes to a logic low causing U5 pin 8 to be at a logic high), or if U3
pin 7 indicates that the feedback is not working (U3 pin 7 goes to a logic high), then the
microprocessor will indicate a filament error and turn off the filament supply.
The small or large filament is selected by the state of U7 driving Q7. U7 pin 12 is at a
logic low for large filament and at a logic high for small filament. Q7 energizes relay K1.
U7 is set by the state of HFD0 and HFD1 being clocked into U7. The clock pulse occurs
when the select lines are set to a 2", causing U4-13 to be at a logic low.
On 208163 boards, another protection circuit is controlled by U8. The current into the
board from the VCC (50 Volts) supply is sensed by R45. If this current is excessive the
optocoupler U8 turns on, disabling U1 through the input on pin 16.
5-24
Service Manual
2-9-3-7 Filament Resistor Board, 208086 (A6)

This printed circuit board mounts the filament resistors and is used to match the
characteristics of different tubes.
2-9-3-8 Automatic Exposure Control Board, 208094 (A10) (Optional)
The Automatic Exposure Control Board terminates exposure when the system is
operating in AEC mode. The AEC sensor (chamber) detects the x-ray energy that enters
the film cassette. When the x-ray energy on the detector reaches the required amount, the
x-ray is terminated.
The board is configured to allow the selection of two chambers named for their location
(wall and table) and three fields in those chambers, if the chambers are so equipped.
Compatible chambers used with this board function by providing a DC potential which is
ionized by the x-ray energy and generate a DC current. This DC current is proportional to
the x-ray energy and is integrated in the chamber, generating a linear ramp.
The 300 volt power supply consists of oscillator U10 driving FET Q2, which provides a
switching voltage to the primary winding of transformer T1. The output of T1 is rectified
by D1 and filtered by C15, R50 and C16. R48 and R49 sample the output voltage and
provide a feedback signal to U10 to keep the voltage constant.
All of the AEC control signals are generated by the microprocessor and connected by the
HF data lines (J1 pins 10, 12, 14, 16, and 18) and the select lines (J1 pins 15, 17, and 19).
These control signals are decoded by latch U2 and decoder U1. All of the control signals
are initiated during the Expose cycle after the EXPOSE key on the control panel is
pressed.
Chamber selection is accomplished by U2-2. WALL is selected when U2-2 is high,
which is input to inverter U12. The low output from U12-8 closes switches U4-2 and -3
and U4-14 and -15. TABLE is selected when U2-2 is low, which closes switches U4-6
and -7 and U4-10 and -11.
Field selection is accomplished by U2 pins 7, 6 or 5 being high, in turn causing invertor
U7 pins 12, 13, or 14 to be low, which enables fields 1, 2 or 3, respectively (pots R2, R5,
and R9, respectively, adjust the gain of each field). The fields can be enabled in any
combination.
The exposure start signal resets the chamber integrators and the exposure stop flip-flop
(U9) in the following sequence: the EXPSTART signal at U2-12 is applied through
switch U4 to inverter U7. The outputs of U7 (U7 pins 17 and 18) reset the integrator in
the selected chamber. The high level at EXPSTART signal also triggers one-shot U8,
which outputs a negative pulse (P1) at U8-4 to reset the EXPSTOP flip flop (U9).
One-shot U8-12 outputs the P2 signal, which is sent to J5. J5 provides a signal interface
between the AEC Interface Board and the tomography option, when connected.
The output ramp from the chamber selected by switch U4 is connected to TP4, which
feeds OP amp U5. U5 is divided into a summing amplifier, a comparator and an
anticipator circuit.
The summing amplifier combines the ramp output voltage at TP4 with the anticipator
output voltage at TP6. R15, R54, R55 and R56 are used to calibrate the circuit for the
desired film density (R54, R55, R56, and R15 are used for speeds of 200, 400, 600, and
800 respectively). The summed output voltage appears at TP7 and is one input to the U5
comparator.
An AECVREF voltage (generated by the microprocessor) which varies according to
selected kVp and density, is applied to J1 pin 13. The voltage is buffered and scaled with
OP amp U6. R32 allows calibration of the reference voltage measured at TP3. R33 allows
for voltage offset adjustment of 0 volts, measured at TP2. The scaled AECVREF voltage
is applied to comparator U5, pin 12 from U6, pin 7.
5-25
Service Manual
When the DC ramp voltage TP7 exceeds the AECVREF voltage, U5, pin 14 goes low,
turning Q1 off. The positive going voltage at the collector of Q1 triggers D flip-flop U9,
which transmits an EXPSTOP signal to the KVP control boards terminating exposure.
The EXPSTOP signal is high during x-ray and goes low to terminate exposure.
The Anticipator circuit compensates for ramp voltages with slow rise times (usually
associated with low mA settings) and causes the EXPSTOP signal to be generated before
the ramp voltage reaches AECVREF voltage. Ramp voltage is amplified and applied to
U5 pin 2 as an Anticipate ramp voltage. The Anticipate ramp voltage is summed with the
ramp voltage and applied to comparator U5, pin 13.
2-9-3-9 Source Charger(s), 208088 (A11 and A14)
For Silhouette HF SE Systems Only
The key to the low input current for this system is the stored energy system. Plus and
minus 205 volt high efficiency, maintenance-free batteries are housed in compartments at
the bottom of the generator cabinet.
Dangerous voltages exist inside these compartments. If these covers
have to be removed for service, it is recommended that the fuses
WARNING inside each assembly be removed. There are four fuses for the
Silhouette HF SE : F12, F13, F14 and F15. The batteries are
continually charged by A11 and A14. When the LEDs (D6 and D9)
are illuminated, current is flowing into the respective battery.
Source Charging
440 VAC is applied across the bridge D1-4 through J1 pins 1-3 from a center tapped
winding on the auto transformer. The positive charger voltage is connected to the battery
through J1-7. This voltage is sensed through the voltage divider R4-R6, with R5 used to
adjust the charging voltage by U1 pin 2 and compared to the +6.3V reference diode D5
on U1 pin 3. The output, U1 pin 1, goes high if the battery voltages goes low, turning on
Q2, D6 and the opto coupler, U2. U2 is used as a triac driver which, when activated, turns
on the triac, Q1, which then charges the battery through the current limiting resistors, R3,
R32, and fuse F1. When the desired battery voltage is achieved, Q1 turns off.
The negative charge voltage is connected to the battery through J1 pin 8. This voltage is
sensed through the voltage divider R20-22 by U3 pin 2 and compared to the -6.3V
reference diode D8 on U3 pin 3. The output, U3 pin 1 goes low if the battery voltage goes
low, turning on Q4, D9 and the opto coupler U4. U4 is used as a triac driver, which when
active turns on Q3, charging the battery through the current limiting resistors R19, R31
and fuse F2. When the desired voltage is achieved, Q3 turns off.
The output voltage of divider R4-R6 is also connected to a second section of U1 and
compared with 90% of the D5 reference voltage to define a minimum effective source
voltage for proper x-ray operation. The output of this section (U5 pin 1) goes to a
negative voltage if the source voltage is too low and is summed with an identical circuit
located in the negative charger voltage divider R33-35.
SES Sensing Circuit
The source charger circuit is equipped with a circuit that senses the stored energy
potential and transmits it to the microprocessor circuit as the VSENSE signal on J1 pin 4.
The microprocessor checks for this voltage to be in a preset range. If VSENSE is not in
the preset range, it will cause the microprocessor board to disable the x-ray exposure.
VSENSE is generated through a voltage divider using R33-35 and the input resistance of
VSENSE on the microprocessor board with respect to ground. This voltage can be
lowered by one of three comparitor outputs going low. Two of these comparitors, U1 and
U3, monitor the state of charge, and the third, U5, monitors the balance of the outputs.
D14 is to prevent VSENSE from going below -.7 VDC.
5-26
Service Manual
2-9-3-10 Power Shut Off Boards (A9)

For Silhouette HF Stored Energy (SE) Systems Only, 208087
The power shut off circuit consists of a transformer, full-wave bridge rectifier and three
relays. This circuit controls input power to system transformer T1 and supplies +30 VDC
to the magnetic brakes in the table and tubestand.
Input power is applied to J1 pins 1 and 10 from the main circuit breaker to the
transformer primary through F2. 35 VAC from the transformer secondary is applied to
the full-wave bridge rectifier (DB1). When input power is on, +30 VDC is provided at J1
pin 6 and for relays K1, K2 and K3 through fuse F1. +30 VDC (J1 pin 6) is provided for
the magnetic brake circuit constantly, independent of the remote power switch or
automatic shut off status.
When the remote power switch (TB1) is set in the ON position (closed), a ground path is
provided for relays K1 and K2 to energize, closing the contacts and allowing input power
to be applied to the system transformer (T1) via E2 and E4. If the system is left with the
power turned on and no x-rays are taken for a period of one hour, the microprocessor will
time-out the system: it transmits a SHUTOFF signal (logic low) to J1 pin 3 energizing
relay K3. Normally closed relay K3 contacts open, removing the ground path from TB1
and de-energizing relays K1 and K2 which remove input power from the system
transformer T1.
Relay K3 will then be latched in the energized position. K3 must be de-energized to turn
the system power back on. This can be done by either setting the remote power switch
(TB1) or main circuit breaker to OFF (open) position, then back to ON.
Note: The automatic shut-off feature can be disabled by entering configuration mode and
accessing the AEC/SES Configuration menu (refer to Chapter 3, Calibration for
instructions).
For Silhouette HF Systems without Stored Energy, 208101

This board functions in a similar manner to the 208087 Power Shut Off Board previously
described, with the exception that K1 and K2 are not included on this board.
When the Remote Power Switch (TB1) is set in the ON position, J1 pin 2 supplies a
ground path to contactor K3, which when energized, provides AC power to the system.
The microprocessor time out system also functions in a similar manner to the 208087
board by removing the ground path at J1 pin 2.
For Silhouette HF Systems with Three-Phase Input, 208122
This board is identical to the 208101 Power Shut Off Board previously described, with
the exception of the input power. The input voltage to the transformer, T1, does not come
from J1, but rather from the two quick connect terminals E1 and E2.
5-27
Service Manual
2-9-3-11 Distribution Board, 208085 (A7)

This board contains two relays and two bleeder-resistors and is connected in series
between the KVP control circuit and current amplifiers. The bleeder resistors discharge
the capacitors to remove any stored potential voltage.
When the system is powered-on, +24 VDC from the microprocessor board is applied to
relays K1 and K2 via J1, pin 4, causing them to energize. Normally closed contacts open,
disconnecting the bleeder-resistors from the circuit.
When the system is powered-off, relays K1 and K2 de-energize, causing the contact to
close, providing a discharge path for the capacitors through bleeder-resistors R1 and R2.
2-9-3-12 Line Voltage Monitor, 208099 (A11)
For Silhouette HF Systems without Stored Energy
The Line Voltage Monitor board consists of two identical circuits, each producing a
voltage proportional to the voltage across the anode and cathode capacitor banks. The
output of each circuit is summed and then scaled to form the VSENSE analog signal,
which is routed to Microprocessor Board A3. The microprocessor board uses the
VSENSE signal to determine whether the line voltage is within the acceptable range for
system operation.
With power on, a positive voltage from the anode capacitor bank is applied through
voltage divider R4, R5 and R6 to voltage follower U1C. Similarly, a negative voltage
from the anode capactior bank is applied through voltage divider R1, R2 and R3 to
voltage follower U1B. Zener diodes Z1 through Z4 ensure that the outputs of the
dividers do not exceed 7 volts. Diodes D3 through D6 and resistors R29 and R30
protect U1B and U1C from the loss of the 15 volt power inputs when voltage is present
on the anode capacitor bank. Voltage followers U1B and U1C buffer the positive and
negative input voltages for application through resistors R13 and R14 to unity gain
differential amplifier U1D. The output from U1D is applied to summing amplifier U2A.
Amplifier U2A also receives the voltage output from U2D. (A similar circuit, consisting
of voltage followers U2B and U2C, and unity gain amplifier U2D, performs the same
function for the cathode capacitor bank.
Amplifier U2A, which has a gain of -2, sums the outputs of differential amplifiers U1D
and U2D. The resulting output at U2A-1 is inverted to a positive voltage by amplifier
U1A to form the VSENSE signal, which can be monitored at TP3. Resistor R26 is used
to adjust the overall circuit gain to the scale factor encoded within the system software.
The Line Voltage Monitor circuit provides a VSENSE signal to the microprocessor
indicating that the line voltage is at the proper level to take an exposure.
2-9-3-13 Serial Interface Board, 208112 (A15)
The OCP may be located as far as 100 feet from the main microprocessor; operation from
this remote location is accomplished through a serial interface. The Serial Interface Board
provides the communication between the main microprocessor and the OCP Front Panel
Display Boards microprocessor via a serial interface cable connected to J2. This board
consists of two ICs: the ACIA, U1, which is the asynchronous serial communications IC,
and U2, the serial line driver/receiver IC. A short ribbon cable connected to J1 connects
this board to the main microprocessor board.
5-27a
Service Manual
2-9-3-14 High Speed Starter

The High Speed Rotor Controller will be discussed in terms of the following circuitry:
the Power Supply, the Power Driver Board and the Control Board.
Power Supply
The power supply consists of some chassis-mounted components and some PCB-
mounted components. Isolation transformer T1 has a 220 VAC primary winding and two
secondary windings: one low voltage, 26 VAC, and one high voltage, 300 VAC, with a
tap at 90 VAC. The AC voltage from both windings are full-wave rectified and filtered.
The 26 VAC winding provides power to the 24 VDC, 15 VDC, and 5 VDC voltage
regulators on the printed circuit board. The 90/300 VAC winding provides nominally 110
VDC for the run voltage and 340 VDC for the boost voltage for the power bridge driver
transistors.
Another component of the power supply is a step-up auto-transformer, T2, which is used
to increase the drive voltage for high-speed boost. The AC voltage waveform generated
by the power bridge drivers is stepped up by 50% and then applied to the x-ray tubess
rotor.
Power Driver Board, 208133
The bridge driver transistors are power MOSFETs (Q1 - Q4) configured in an H-bridge.
The drive signals for the MOSFETs gates are opto-isolated from the control logic,
insuring isolation between the high DC voltage and the control logic. This is achieved by
using a floating capacitor technique for the two high-side MOSFETs. The control logic
alternately turns on the top-main (TM, Q1) and bottom-common (BC, Q4), and then
the top-common (TC, Q3) and bottom-main (BM, Q2) MOSFETs to provide
alternating current to the anode rotor. The control logic also insures that the top and
bottom MOSFETs on each half of the bridge (Q1/Q2 and Q3/Q4) are never on
(conducting) simultaneously.
Opto-isolators U5 and U8 provide sensing of excessive currents in the main or common
sides of the power bridge. If this is detected, the FETs are instantly turned off for a period
of 10 seconds. This will cause the ROTOR RUNNING signal to the microprocessor to be
negated, indicating a rotor error.
Control Board, 208134
Timing Logic: The time-base for the system clock and timing circuitry is a 32.768 kHz
crystal oscillator. The oscillator is divided by 3 to create a 10.922 kHz clock for the
motor drive circuitry and divided by 64 for the 512 Hz clock for the boost and brake time
generators. The high-speed and low-speed boost and brake times are both DIP switch
(SW1 and SW2, respectively) selectable. The boost time (generated by counter U5 and
decoder U4A and U4B) may be set to 31 possible times from 0.25 to 7.75 seconds, in
increments of one-quarter second. The brake time (generated by counter U6 and decoder
U4C) may be set to 7 possible times from 1 to 7 seconds, in increments of 1 second.
Control Logic: The control logic has two main functions:
To generate the drive voltage waveforms for the power MOSFET bridge - The 60 and
180 Hz MOSFET drive signals are generated by counter U1 and EPROM U2. The
10.922 kHz clock is applied to counter U1. This is divided down by the EPROM U2
to 180 Hz and 60 Hz. Nine output bits of the counter are connected to the EPROM
address lines, providing 512 possible states for each of the four waveforms (EPROM
output lines) for the four MOSFETs in the bridge. The waveforms are rectangular
waves which drive the top-main (TM) and bottom-common (BC) MOSFETs
simultaneously. After the TM and BC MOSFETs are turned off, there is a delay and
then the top-common (TC) and bottom-main (BM) are turned on. When they are
turned off, there is again a delay before the TM and BC MOSFETs are turned on.
5-27b
Service Manual
To generate the sequencing signals for the boost, run, and brake times -The durations
of the bridge drive waveforms for the boost and brake cycles are selected by the
timing circuitrys DIP switches, as described above. The duration of the run time is
determined by the systems main microprocessor. The microprocessor also selects
high speed or low speed operation. The boost, run, brake, and high/low speed select
signals are four additional address line inputs to the EPROM.
Rotor Interlock Circuitry: This circuitry consists of two current sensing transformers: one
(T1) for the main motor winding and one (T2) for the phase winding. Four comparators
(U19) set the current thresholds for the boost and run times for the main and phase
windings. The ROTOR RUNNING signal is driven high after the boost time and during
the run time if, and only if, the minimum current for the run time is present. There is also
a frequency discriminator, U18B, which detects if the motor is running in high or low
speed. When running in high speed, the HIGH SPEED RUNNING signal is asserted if
the ROTOR RUNNING signal is high.
After supplying the START SIGNAL to the Controller, the main microprocessor waits
for the ROTOR RUNNING signal to be driven high, indicating that the rotor has been
properly boosted and x-ray may begin. If ROTOR RUNNING is not high within a period
of about 5 seconds, the microprocessor will remove the START SIGNAL and indicate a
Rotor? error on the Front Panel LCD.
The ROTOR RUNNING signal stays high during the brake cycle so that the
microprocessor will not restart the rotor or switch tubes (in the case of a two-tube system)
until the brake cycle is complete.
5-27c
Service Manual
5-27d
Service Manual
SECTION 3
COLLIMATOR

3-1-1 Overview
The D-70A collimator defines the size and shape of the x-ray beam. This is accomplished
by the use of shutters which are adjusted to change the size of the beam. These shutters
are positioned manually by turning indicator knobs or automatically by sensors which
adjust the field to conform to the size of the image receptor.
This section provides the logic theory for the following circuitry:
Modes of Operation
Power Supply
Light Localizer Timer
3-1-2 Modes Of Operation
The D-70A operates in either manual or automatic mode, referring to manual or
automatic shutter adjustment.
3-1-2-1 Manual Mode
The collimator operates in manual mode when either of two conditions exist: the sensing
tray is not inserted into the bucky or the collimator is tilted greater than 12 from the
vertical or horizontal position. In this mode, the shutters must be manually adjusted to
the size of the required image.
When the tray is not inserted into the bucky, the tray-in switches are open. Under this
condition, zener diode CR18 conducts, turning on Q9. When Q9 is on, U4 pins 5 and 6
are kept low. If the tray were in place, the tray-in switch would be closed and Q9 would
be off, and U4 pins 5 and 6 would be high (12V).
When the collimator is tilted more than 12 , the tilt switches are open, leaving U4 pins 5
and 6 low. When U4 pins 5 and 6 are low, then U4 pin 4 is high, turning on Q5 and the
Manual light. In addition, U4 pin 8 is held high, resulting in U4 pin 10 being low, which
holds Q6 off, thereby inhibiting the Exposure Hold light and relay, K2.
3-1-2-2 Automatic Mode
Automatic operation is enabled when a cassette is placed in a tray, the collimator senses
SID switch closures at either 40" or 72", and the collimator is tilted within 5 from either
the vertical or horizontal position. In this mode, the shutters are automatically adjusted to
within +/-2% of the image receptor size.
When the cassette tray is in place, the cassette tray switch is closed; zener diode CR18 is
not conducting and Q9 is off. One of the tilt switches is enabled, applying 12V to U4 pins
5 and 6. U4 pin 4 is in turn driven low, turning off Q5 and the Manual light.
Shutter drive operation is controlled by two 24 VAC reversible synchronous motors.
When the shutter size is greater than the image receptor size and automatic mode is
enabled, the following conditions exist: U6 pins 1 and 7 will be at a logic low, resulting
in U5 pins 8 and 10 being high. At the same time, U2 pin 11 is set to a high, which
results in a high at U8 pin 2 and a low at U8 pin 4. U8 pin 9 is high and U8 pin 6 is low.
U8 pin 6 being low, causes U7 pins 1 and 9 to be low, forcing U7 pins 3 and 10 to be
low, resulting in K1 and K5 being off. Since both inputs to U7A and U7B are high, U9
pins 15 and 14 are low, turning on relays K4 and K6. K4 and K6 will then drive the
shutter motors in a closing direction.
5-28
Service Manual
The shutter motors are geared to the cross and long sensing potentiometers. As the
motors close, the voltage on TP7 and TP8 decreases until the voltage is slightly less than
the voltage on TP4 and TP3, respectively. At this point, comparator amplifier outputs,
U6 pins 1 and 7, switch to a logic high, causing U5 pins 8 and 10 to go low, turning off
K4 and K6, thereby stopping the motors. Consequently, the Ready lamp lights.
Any attempt to set the shutters at a size greater than the size of the image receptor will
result in the Exposure Hold light coming on and U6 pins 1 and 7 being a low, thereby
activating the cross and long motors, driving the shutters back to the image receptor size.
Adjusting the shutters manually to a shutter setting smaller than the image receptor size is
accepted, as U6 pins 1 and 7 will remain in a logic high state. The Ready lights will be on
as long as the shutters are set at the image receptor size or smaller.
When the shutters just exceed the image receptor size, the outputs of the comparator
amplifier U6 pins 1 and 7 become low, setting the latch, U2, which produces a high on
pin 11 and on U5 pin 13. This activates the close motors to bring the shutters back to the
image receptor size, shutting off the Exposure Hold light and turning on the Ready lights.
If the shutters are smaller than the image receptor prior to insertion of the tray, the
following will occur when the tray is inserted: U6 pins 1 and 7 will be high, U5 pins 8
and 10 will be low, resulting in U7 pins 4 and 11 being a low. U7 pins 2 and 8 will be
high (they monitor U6 pins 1 and 7) and U4 pin 10 is high driving
U8 pins 5 and 8 high, and turning on the Exposure Hold light. U8 pins 1 and 3 will be
high. U8 pin 4 is high because U5 pin 12 is high, resulting in a high on pin 6, the output
of U8. U7 pins 3 and 10 are both high and the outputs of U9 pins 12 and 13 are low. K1
and K5 are energized, opening the shutters.
When a cassette is removed from the tray, the voltage high is removed from U1 pin 13,
resulting in a high reset voltage to U2 pin 13 and a low on the output U2 pin 11. The
Ready lamps will go off and the Manual lamp will come on. The insertion of the tray
will turn off the Manual lamp and the Exposure Hold lamp will come on. The system will
remain in the exposure hold condition while the shutters automatically adjust fully open
and closed until the Ready lamps come on.
3-1-3 Power Supply
24 VAC from the x-ray generator is continuously supplied to terminals 6 and F. The AC
voltage is rectified through CR1 - CR4 and filtered by C1. The unregulated DC voltage
(24 VDC) is then applied to a series regulator, U10. The output of the regulator is 12
VDC +/-5%. 12 VDC is used to power U-1 to U-8, the unregulated 24 VDC is used to
power relays K1 - K6. 24 VAC is used to power the long and cross motors.
3-1-4 Collimator Projection Lamp Regulator/30 Second Timer Board, 208120
This board serves two functions:
To regulate the intensity of the collimators halogen projection lamp
To automatically turn the lamp off after a preset time of 30 seconds has elapsed (the
lamp may also be turned off manually)
24 VAC is continually applied between terminals 5 (HOT) and 3 (COM). The AC
voltage is rectified by diodes D1 and D2 to DC voltages across C1 and C3 of
approximately +/-30 VDC. These two unregulated DC voltages are regulated to +/-15
VDC by U1 and U2, and are used to power ICs U3 (hex inverting Schmitt trigger), U4
(dual D-type flip-flop), and U6 (dual Op-amp).
The 30 second timer circuitry operates as follows: when a Lamp ON/OFF pushbutton(s)
switch connected between terminals 4/9 and 7/8 is (are) depressed, U3 pin 3 is brought to
+15V (high), which brings the clock input of U4 pin 3 high, which in turn toggles the Q
output (U4 pin 1) from a low to a high state. This turns on transistor Q1 which activates
the opto-isolated triac, U5, which turns on the main triac, Q2, which applies AC voltage
to the collimator halogen lamp.
5-29
Service Manual
U3 pin 1 going high also begins charging capacitor C6 through potentiometer R3 and
resistor R4. When the voltage across C6 applied to U3 pin 5 reaches U3s threshold
voltage of 6 to 9 volts, its output (U3 pin 6) goes low and the reset input of U4 (pin 4)
goes high resetting its Q output (U4 pin 1) and turning off Q1, U5, Q2, and the lamp.
The threshold voltage is reached after a nominal 30 second delay, preset at the factory by
adjustment of potentiometer R3. Depressing the ON/OFF pushbutton while the light is
on, toggles the flip-flop U4 off, which shuts off the lamp, and also rapidly discharges C6
through diode D3 so it is ready to begin another 30 second interval.
While the lamp bulb is on, its RMS voltage, which determines its brightness, is regulated
by the circuit comprised of D4-D7, R11-R18, C9-C13, L1, U6, D8 and R7. The voltage
across the bulb is sensed and rectified through diodes D4-D7, and applied to brightness
adjustment pot R12. True RMS regulation is achieved by the bridge circuit which
compares the RMS voltage across a reference bulb, L1, whose resistance and therefore its
voltage, also varies proportionately to its RMS voltage, with the average voltage across
resistor R14. This voltage comparison and filtering is done by op-amp U6, whose output
is in turn compared to the average AC input voltage. This voltage difference is used to
control the phase angle at which triacs U5 and U6 turn on, controlling and maintaining
the adjustable voltage applied to the halogen lamp. The lamp intensity is set at the factory
for the correct illumination level.
3-1-5 Maintenance Procedures By Component
3-1-5-1 Replacing The Face Mask
1. Remove the four (4) screws holding the outer shroud in place (Illustration -).
2. Remove the adjustment knobs.
3. Slide the outer shroud forward to remove it from the collimator inner housing.
4. Remove the four (4) screws holding the bottom cover in place.
5. The mask can now be removed by removing the four (4) screws holding the mask
clamps in place.
6. Remove the mask.
7. Place the new mask in position.
8. Place the clamp down bars over the mask and reinsert the four (4) screws.
9. Reinstall the bottom cover using the four (4) screws.
10. Realign the center of the mask to the center of the light field, being careful to stay
aligned with the light field.
11. Reinstall the outer shroud.
3-1-5-2 Cross Shutter Dial Cord Replacement
1. Remove the outer shroud (refer to procedures in section , Replacing the Face Mask).
2. Remove the bottom cover.
3. Loosen the dial cord clamp on the top and bottom shutter blocks but do not remove.
4. Remove the four (4) screws holding the shutter assembly in place.
5. Remove the shutter assembly from the collimator by tilting the assembly (end closest
to the rear of the collimator) upwards and pulling the assembly out of the collimator.
6. Turn the assembly over so that the cross field shutters are face up.
7. Loosen the four (4) screws holding the shutters to the dial cord.
8. Remove damaged dial cord from the shutter assembly. Take note as to the location of
the spring, since this is the starting point for replacement of the cord (Illustration 5-10
).
5-30
Service Manual
9. Starting with the dial cord end attached to the spring, partially wind the dial cord
around the pulley guides.
Use Illustration 5-10 as a reference and proceed to wind the cord as follows:
From the lower guide of pulley #1 to the lower guide of pulley #2,
To the upper guide of pulley #1,
To the lower guide of pulley #3,
To the lower guide of pulley #4 to the spring.
10. Extend the spring slightly and tie the dial cord to the free end.
11. Reverse the shutter assembly removal procedure.
12. It will now be necessary to recalibrate the collimator using the calibration procedures
in Chapter .
5-31
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 5-10
DIAL CORD REPLACEMENT
Top Pulley Track Dial Cord Spring
4 1
3 2
Bottom Pulley Track Dial Cord
5-32
Service Manual
3-1-5-3 Long Shutters Dial Cord Replacement

1. Remove the outer shroud.
4. Remove the damaged dial cord from the shutter assembly. Take note of the location
of the spring, since this is the starting point for the replacement cord (Illustration
5-10)
around as follows:
From the lower guide of pulley #4 to the spring.
7. It will now be necessary to perform the collimator calibration procedures as outlined
in Chapter 3.
3-1-5-4 Replacing The Light Localizer Lamp
1. Required parts: one (1) 150 watt 24 VAC high intensity quartz iodide lamp (P/N:
D200005).
2. To gain access to the lamp, it will be necessary to remove the back plate exposing the
lamp (refer to Illustration 3-24).
3. Remove the lamp heat shield by loosening (DO NOT REMOVE) the two (2) nuts and
sliding the bracket over to the right and then straight out.
4. Remove the existing lamp from its socket.
5. Insert the new bulb being sure to keep it perpendicular in its socket. Please note: DO
NOT touch the lamp with your fingers. Use a piece of paper around the bulb to install
it. The oils on your fingers can drastically reduce the useful life of the bulb.
6. Reinstall the lamp bracket heat shield.
7. Recalibrate the light to x-ray field if it has been shifted (Refer to Chapter 3,
Calibration).
8. Close and secure the back plate.
9. Measure lamp intensity using a footcandle meter such as a Digaphot Model 3300.
The intensity must be a minimum of 16 footcandles (170 lux) and a maximum of 22
footcandles (234 lux) at 40" SID to insure compliance (15 footcandles). If it is
necessary to adjust the lamp intensity, remove the four (4) 4-40 x 3/16 pan head
screws that secure the face plate to the gear plate assembly (refer to Illustration 5-11)
to provide access to the Timer Board.
Turning pot R12 on the 208130 Timer Board counterclockwise increases the intensity
of the lamp; adjust for a minimum of 16 footcandles (170 lux) and a maximum of 22
footcandles (234 lux) at 40" SID; Adjusting for greater intensity will increase
brightness at a sacrifice in bulb life.
5-33
Service Manual
3-1-5-5 Replacing The Timer Board

1. Remove the four (4) 4-40 x 3/16 pan head screws that secure the face plate to the gear
plate assembly (refer to Illustration 5-11).
2. Remove the Face Plate.
3. Remove the timer wire harness.
4. Remove the three (3) 3/16 x 1/4 pan head screws and remove the Timer Board.
5. Install the new Timer Board and reconnect the harness (refer to Table 2-2 and
Illustration 5-11).
ILLUSTRATION 5-11
TIMER BOARD REPLACEMENT
Adjust Timer
Turning pot R3 clockwise increases the time duration; adjust for 30 seconds nominal.
Adjust Lamp Intensity
Refer to the procedure outlined in section , Replacing the Light Localizer Lamp for
measuring and adjusting lamp intensity.
6. Assemble the Face Plate to the gear plate assembly.
3-1-6 Possible Faults
3-1-6-1 Unit Stays In Exposure Hold
Is the SID properly set ? Verify that the unit is at 40" Vertical, 40" or 72" Horizontal
(whichever is applicable).
3-1-6-2 Unit Stays In Manual Mode
Is the cassette tray fully inserted into the cassette holder with cassette locked in ?
Is the collimator tilted greater +/- 12 ?
3-1-6-3 All Panel Lights Out
Is the power on ?
Is the key in keyswitch for emergency override of PBL system ? Remove the key to
return to PBL mode. If the system will not return to PBL mode, call a service
representative.
5-34
Service Manual

3-2-1 Collimator Projection Lamp Regulator/30 Second Timer Board, 208120
This board serves two functions:
To regulate the intensity of the collimators halogen projection lamp
To automatically turn the lamp off after a preset time of 30 seconds has elapsed (the lamp
may also be turned off manually)
24 VAC is continually applied between terminals 5 (HOT) and 3 (COM). The AC
voltage is rectified by diodes D1 and D2 to DC voltages across C1 and C3 of
approximately +/-30 VDC. These two unregulated DC voltages are regulated to +/-15
VDC by U1 and U2, and are used to power ICs U3 (hex inverting Schmitt trigger), U4
(dual D-type flip-flop), and U6 (dual Op-amp).
The 30 second timer circuitry operates as follows: when a Lamp ON/OFF pushbutton(s)
switch connected between terminals 4/9 and 7/8 is (are) depressed, U3 pin 3 is brought to
+15V (high), which brings the clock input of U4 pin 3 high, which in turn toggles the Q
output (U4 pin 1) from a low to a high state. This turns on transistor Q1 which activates
the opto-isolated triac, U5, which turns on the main triac, Q2, which applies AC voltage
to the collimator halogen lamp.
U3 pin 1 going high also begins charging capacitor C6 through potentiometer R3 and
resistor R4. When the voltage across C6 applied to U3 pin 5 reaches U3s threshold
voltage of 6 to 9 volts, its output (U3 pin 6) goes low and the reset input of U4 (pin 4)
goes high resetting its Q output (U4 pin 1) and turning off Q1, U5, Q2, and the lamp.
The threshold voltage is reached after a nominal 30 second delay, preset at the factory by
adjustment of potentiometer R3. Depressing the ON/OFF pushbutton while the light is
on, toggles the flip-flop U4 off, which shuts off the lamp, and also rapidly discharges C6
through diode D3 so it is ready to begin another 30 second interval.
While the lamp bulb is on, its RMS voltage, which determines its brightness, is regulated
by the circuit comprised of D4-D7, R11-R18, C9-C13, L1, U6, D8 and R7. The voltage
across the bulb is sensed and rectified through diodes D4-D7, and applied to brightness
adjustment pot R12. True RMS regulation is achieved by the bridge circuit which
compares the RMS voltage across a reference bulb, L1, whose resistance and therefore its
voltage, also varies proportionately to its RMS voltage, with the average voltage across
resistor R14. This voltage comparison and filtering is done by op-amp U6, whose output
is in turn compared to the average AC input voltage. This voltage difference is used to
control the phase angle at which triacs U5 and U6 turn on, controlling and maintaining
the adjustable voltage applied to the halogen lamp. The lamp intensity is set at the
factory for the correct illumination level.
5-35
Service Manual
3-2-2 Maintenance Procedures By Component

3-2-2-1 Replacing The Face Mask
1. Remove the four (4) screws holding the outer shroud in place (Illustration 3-37).
2. Remove the adjustment knobs.
3. Slide the outer shroud forward to remove it from the collimator inner housing.
4. Remove the four (4) screws holding the bottom cover in place.
5. The mask can now be removed by removing the four (4) screws holding the mask
clamps in place.
6. Remove the mask.
7. Place the new mask in position.
8. Place the clamp down bars over the mask and reinsert the four (4) screws.
9. Reinstall the bottom cover using the four (4) screws.
10. Realign the center of the mask to the center of the light field, being careful to stay
aligned with the light field.
11. Reinstall the outer shroud.
3-2-2-2 Cross Shutter Dial Cord Replacement
1. Remove the collimator from the tubestand.
2. Remove the outer shroud (refer to procedures in section , Replacing the Face Mask).
3. Remove the top and bottom cover.
4. Loosen the dial cord clamp on the top and bottom shutter blocks but do not remove.
Remove the four screws holding the gear plate in place and move the gear plate as far
as possible from the collimator.
5. Remove the four (4) screws holding the shutter assembly in place.
6. Remove the shutter assembly from the collimator by tilting the assembly (end closest
to the rear of the collimator) upwards and pulling the assembly out of the collimator.
7. Turn the assembly over so that the cross field shutters are face up.
9. Remove damaged dial cord from the shutter assembly. Take note as to the location of
the spring, since this is the starting point for replacement of the cord (Illustration
5-12).
around the pulley guides.
Use Illustration 5-12 as a reference and proceed to wind the cord as follows:
To the lower guide of pulley #4 to the spring.
12. Reverse the shutter assembly removal procedure.
13. It will now be necessary to recalibrate the collimator using the calibration procedures
in Chapter .
5-36
Service Manual
3-2-2-3 Long Shutters Dial Cord Replacement

1. Remove the outer shroud.
4. Remove the damaged dial cord from the shutter assembly. Take note as to the
location of the spring, since this is the starting point for the replacement cord
(Illustration 5-12).
around as follows:
To the lower guide of pulley #4, to the spring.
7. It will now be necessary to perform the collimator calibration procedures as outlined
in Chapter 3.
ILLUSTRATION 5-12
DIAL CORD REPLACEMENT
DIALCORD.EPS
5-37
Service Manual
3-2-2-4 Replacing The Light Localizer Lamp

1. Required parts: one (1) 150 watt 24 VAC high intensity quartz iodide lamp (P/N:
D200005).
2. Turn power off to the collimator.
3. To gain access to the lamp, it will be necessary to remove the back plate exposing the
lamp (refer to Illustration 3-35).
4. Remove the lamp heat shield by loosening (DO NOT REMOVE) the two (2) nuts and
sliding the bracket over to the right and then straight out.
5. Remove the existing lamp from its socket.
6. Insert the new bulb being sure to keep it perpendicular in its socket. Please note: DO
NOT touch the lamp with your fingers. Use a piece of paper around the bulb to install
it. The oils on your fingers can drastically reduce the useful life of the bulb.
7. Reinstall the lamp bracket heat shield.
8. Recalibrate the light to x-ray field if it has been shifted (Refer to Chapter 3,
Calibration).
9. Close and secure the back plate.
10. Measure lamp intensity using a footcandle meter such as a Digaphot Model 3300. The
intensity must be a minimum of 16 footcandles (170 lux) and a maximum of 22
footcandles (234 lux) at 40" SID to insure compliance (15 footcandles). If it is
necessary to adjust the lamp intensity, remove the four (4) 4-40 x 3/16 pan head
screws that secure the face plate to the gear plate assembly (refer to Illustration 5-13)
to provide access to the Timer Board.
Turning pot R12 on the 208120 Timer Board counterclockwise increases the intensity
of the lamp; adjust for a minimum of 16 footcandles (170 lux) and a maximum of 22
footcandles (234 lux) at 40" SID; Adjusting for greater intensity will increase
brightness at a sacrifice in bulb life.
3-2-2-5 Replacing The Timer Board
1. Remove the four (4) 4-40 x 3/16 pan head screws that secure the face plate to the gear
plate assembly (refer to Illustration 5-13).
2. Remove the face plate.
3. Remove the timer wire harness.
4. Remove the three (3) 6-32 x 3/16 pan head screws and remove the Timer Board.
5. Install the new Timer Board and reconnect the harness (refer to Table 2-2 and
Illustration 5-13).
Adjust Timer
Turning pot R3 clockwise increases the time duration; adjust for 30 seconds nominal.
Adjust Lamp Intensity
Refer to the procedure outlined in section , Replacing the Light Localizer Lamp for
measuring and adjusting lamp intensity.
6. Assemble the face plate to the gear plate assembly.
5-38
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 5-13
TIMER BOARD REPLACEMENT
5-39
Service Manual
SECTION 4
VERTICAL BUCKY
4-1 Assembly and Disassembly of the Bucky Structure

To assemble the Silhouette HF Bucky Structure, refer to Illustrations 5-14 through 5-19
in this section.
4-2 Assembly and Disassembly of the Flat Base Mounting Plate
Rest the bottom end of the tubestand assembly on soft support material and attach the
Flat Base Mounting Plate (I) with four (4) 3/8" - 16 x 3/4" hex head bolts, 3/8" flat
washers and 3/8" split- lock washers (refer to Illustration 5-14).
ILLUSTRATION 5-14
BASE MOUNTING PLATE
5-40
Service Manual
4-3 Assembly and Disassembly of Collar

1. Remove support material from the bottom end and insert the bucky structure
Counterweight (M) into the top end of the tubestand, sliding it to approximately 12"
from the bottom (refer to Illustration 5-15).
ILLUSTRATION 5-15
MOUNTING COLLAR
2. Assemble the Collar Locking Knob as follows:

a. Remove the lock knob and the flat hex head bolt from the inside of the Collar (J).
b. Assemble the bolt so that the flat hex is on the inside of the Collar.
c. Screw the lock knob onto the bolt and tighten the two (2) 3/32" allen screws.
5-41
Service Manual
3. Remove one (1) 3/4" x 2" x 1/4" thick steel Cable Bracket bolted to the inside of the
Collar (refer to Illustration 5-16). Dress Counterweight Cables through the Pulley
Wheel Assembly (B), making sure they are not crossed. Bolt Counterweight Cables to
the cable bracket using two (2) 1/4 - 20 x 3/4" hex head bolts, 1/4" flat washers, and
1/4" external tooth lockwashers. Apply Locktite #242 or equivalent.
ILLUSTRATION 5-16
INSIDE COLLAR
5-42
Service Manual
4. Slide the Collar onto the tubestand from the top, observing orientation of the tube
mount side with the front of the tubestand. Lock the Collar with the Collar Locking
Knob (J) located on the left side of the Collar (refer to Illustration 5-17.)
ILLUSTRATION 5-17
COLLAR LOCKING KNOB
5-43
Service Manual
5. Bolt the cable bracket with attached cables to the inside of the Collar using one (1)
3/8 - 16 x 1" hex head bolt. Be sure to insert the cotter pin into the hole in bolt.
Spread the cotter pin legs (refer to Illustration 5-18).
ILLUSTRATION 5-18
COTTER PIN LOCATION
5-44
Service Manual
6. Mount the Pulley Wheel Assembly (B) to the tubestand using three (3) 1/4" internal
tooth star washers and three (3) 1/4 - 20 x 3/4" hex head bolts. Loosen the Collar
Locking Knob (J) and carefully move the Collar down the tubestand to take up slack
in the Counterweight Cables. Tighten the Collar Locking Knob in this position. (Refer
to Illustration 5-19.)
ILLUSTRATION 5-19
COLLAR LOCKING KNOB
7. Carefully raise the tubestand to an upright position with the Pulley Wheel facing
front. The Collar will rise up the tubestand because of the pull of the Counterweight.
8. Attach top mounting L Bracket (A) to Pulley Wheel Assembly top cap (B) using
1/4-20 x 3/4 hex heads and split washers.
9. Attach Bucky (F) to Bucky Bracket (H).
10. Mount Phenolic Front (G) to Bucky (F).
11. Turn on collimator.
12. Align the collimator cross hair lines to the center of the Phenolic Front (G).
13. Attach the tubestand assembly (D) to floor through Flat Base Mounting Plate (I) using
appropriate hardware.
14. Attach tubestand assembly (D) to wall using the optional Wall-Mounting Bar (K) and
Wall-Mounting L Bracket (A).
5-45
Service Manual
SECTION 5
TUBE STAND
To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed

WARNING prior to making and removing any electrical connections.
5-1 Transverse Carriage Assembly Removal
To remove the Transverse Carriage Assembly, refer to Illustrations 5-20 and 5-21 in this
section.
1. Cover radiographic table top with a blanket or similar protective covering.
2. Lower tube/collimator/handgrips to a comfortable working height and secure by
either strapping collar to tube stand or by removing a Bearing Rail screw and
installing a 1/4-20 bolt above collar (see Illustration 5-20).
3. Remove four (4) socket head screws, lockwashers and flat washers securing Tube
Fork or Trunnion to Transverse Carriage Assembly (see Illustration 5-21). Rest
tube/collimator/handgrips on table top.
4. Remove four (4) pan head screws and flat washers securing Transverse Carriage
Assembly Front Cover to Transverse Carriage Assembly.
5. Remove two (2) pan head screws and flat washers securing Magnetic Lock Access
Plate to Transverse Carriage Assembly. Disconnect red and black wires from positive
(+) and negative (-) wires, respectively, on Magnetic Lock Assembly.
6. Remove eight (8) truss head screws securing Transverse Carriage Assembly Housing
to Tranverse Carriage Assembly and withdraw Tranverse Carriage Assembly from
Housing.
5-2 Transverse Carriage Assembly Installation
To install the Transverse Carriage Assembly, refer to Illustrations 5-20 and 5-21 in this
section.
1. Carefully, insert Tranverse Carriage Assembly into Transverse Carriage Assembly
Housing (align Magnetic Lock Access Plate over Magnetic Lock). Apply
semi-permanent (blue) loctite to threads and secure using eight (8) truss head screws.
Be sure screws are tightened securely (see Illustration 5-21).
2. Connect red and black wires to positive (+) and negative (-) wires, respectively, on
Magnetic Lock Assembly.
3. Install Transverse Carriage Assembly Front Cover on Transverse Carriage Assembly
using four (4) pan head screws and flat washers.
4. Mount tube/collimator/handgrips by securing Tube Fork (or Trunnion) to Transverse
Carriage Assembly using four (4) socket head screws, lockwashers and flat washers.
5. Remove strap or 1/4-20 bolt and re-install Bearing Rail screw (see Illustration 5-20).
6. Check that Transverse Boom is level (see Illustration 2-55).
7. Level collimator and perform light field-to-x-ray field and x-ray field-to-film receptor
alignment procedures (refer to Chapter 3, Calibration).
5-46
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 5-20
LOCATION OF BEARING RAIL SCREWS BEARING RAIL SCREWS
ILLUSTRATION 5-21
TRANSVERSE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
5-47
Service Manual
5-48
Service Manual
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
SECTION 1
TABLE
1-1 Overview
This section is designed to assist the system user and service technician in maintaining
the smooth operation of the table. The user is responsible for performing certain routine
maintenance and inspection procedures while the service technician performs the
required electrical and mechanical inspections.
Maintenance procedures are required on a semi-annual basis. Safe equipment
performance requires the attention of service personnel who are specifically trained and
experienced with medical x-ray apparatus. Applicable preventive maintenance or any
repair service should be performed by these skilled individuals.
Personnel engaged in maintenance activities should exercise normal
caution and care while working with electro-mechanical equipment.
Before removing or opening any electrical power panels or covers,
verify that the incoming power supply is turned OFF. In the event
maintenance procedures require power to be supplied to the unit,
extreme care MUST be exercised to insure the safety of service or
other personnel in the area. When working on the scissors assembly,
be sure that the safety rings for the drive actuator are in the secured
position (see Illustrations 6-2 and 6-3). Verify that the equipment is
properly grounded before attempting any electrical operation.
This equipment was designed to insure maximum safety. Aside from routine
maintenance, any abnormal noise, vibration, or unusual performance should be
investigated by a qualified service representative.
1-2 User Maintenance
1-2-1 Cleaning
basis, the table surface should be wiped clean. Painted metal surfaces should be cleaned
clean wet cloth, then dry. Never use abrasive polish on this equipment.
to any cleaning.
WARNING
To remove the cassette tray from the housing for cleaning or repair, proceed as follows:
1. Float the table top fully back.
2. Pull the cassette tray out by the handle until it stops.
3. Grasp both sides of the tray with your right hand placed near the table and your left
hand towards the tray front as shown in Illustration 6-1.
4. Locate the finger hole on the right side of the tray bottom. A spring-loaded plate
covers this hole. Press the plate with your right index finger, lift the cassette tray up
slightly and pull the tray away from the housing.
6-1
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 6-1
REMOVING THE CASSETTE TRAY
1-3 Service Maintenance

1-3-1 Visual Inspection
A complete series of inspections and functional checks was conducted at the time of
installation to insure proper operation of the system. The following inspection and
adjustment procedures are recommended to maintain the system in its original operating
condition.
1. Check for evidence of loose hardware or loose wires.
2. Verify that all ground conductors are properly and securely installed and free of
corrosion or damage.
3. Check all electrical cabling and wiring for wear and fraying.
4. Check all bearings and bearing surfaces for cleanliness and corrosion.
5. Conduct a general inspection for worn or damaged parts.
6. Visually inspect for wear and cleanliness.
NOTE Step 7 is applicable to the Hi-Lo Elevating table only. The safety rings are used to lock
the scissor assembly into a secured position when replacing the drive actuator
7. Verify that the two safety rings are properly located in the cross axis holes of the
drive actuator mounting pins (see Illustrations 6-2 and 6-3).
8. Perform an operational test and check table travel and positions.
6-2
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 6-2
SAFETY RING IN RESTING LOCATION
SAFETY RING
ILLUSTRATION 6-3
SAFETY RING SECURED POSITION
SAFETY
RING
1-3-2 Functional Check for Hi-Lo Elevating Tables

1. Raise the table to the full up position and then turn power off.
2. Remove the upper and lower cover panels from the left side of the table as follows:
a. Remove the upper panel by unscrewing the two (2) screws across the top of the
panel and then the screws at the lower corners which hold the front panel corners
to the side cover.
b. Loosen the nuts that attach the top of the bottom side covers to the front and rear
covers. Loosen but do not remove the two (2) bottom nuts on the lower bracket.
Slide the bottom cover straight out. The scissor assembly is now exposed.
6-3
Service Manual
3. Clean any dirt or grit and remove any foreign matter from the travel shafts of the
scissors assembly.
4. Wipe down the linear bearing shafts using a clean, dry cloth.
5. Check the mounting hardware which mounts the table base to the floor for a secure,
tight fit. Be sure to check all six (6) mounting points.
6. Lubricate the points as shown in Illustrations 6-4, 6-5, and 6-6. Use light weight
machine quality oil only!
7. Check that the wire connections from the Six-Way Logic Board to the cross brace and
up to the table are connected and not loose or frayed.
8. Turn power on to the table.
Exercise extreme care to insure the safety of service or other
personnel in the area. DO NOT insert hands, tools, etc. into the
scissor assembly area while power is on.
9. Check table travel by driving the table down and then up. Make sure that nothing is
binding or pulling during the up/down travel movement.
10. Perform the Operational Check procedures. Make adjustments to the limit switches if
necessary.
11. On PBL systems, verify table/collimator S.I.D. Interlock feature.
12. Replace the table cover panels.
13. Place a loaded cassette into the bucky tray and take a projection. Inspect the film to
determine whether the bucky and collimator are still in alignment.
ILLUSTRATION 6- 4
LUBRICATION POINTS
6-4
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 6-5
LUBRICATION POINTS
ILLUSTRATION 6-6
LUBRICATION POINTS
1-3-3 Replacing the Drive Actuator: Hi-Lo Elevating Tables only

Make sure to remove any objects from the table top before
continuing.
1. Raise the table to the full up position and then turn power off.
2. Remove all eight (8) side covers.
3. Locate and remove the two safety pins in the cross axis holes of the drive actuator
mounting (clevis) pins (see Illustration 6-2).
6-5
Service Manual
4. Insert the safety pins through scissor locking holes located at the crossing point of the
front and rear scissors (see Illustration 6-3). Push pin completely through both outer
1/4" thick scissor pieces and 1/2" thick inner scissor piece. Hole alignment is
achieved by raising or lowering the table slightly (turn power on to achieve alignment
and then turn off again or else use a mechanical jack).
Insert the safety pin into the front scissor from the front of the table and the rear
pin from the rear of the table.
Never reach through the scissor assembly. The safety pins are used
to lock the scissor assembly into a secured position to prevent injury
when replacing the drive actuator.
5. Unplug the two-wire electrical connector located near the body of the drive
actuator. Do not unplug the connector on the Logic Board.
6. With safety pins installed, remove clevis pins from both ends of the actuator. The
actuator can now be removed.
7. Proceed to install the new actuator. Align and slip the clevis pins through both
ends of the drive actuator. Remove safety pins from the scissor locking holes and
re-insert the safety pins in the cross axis holes of the clevis pins.
NOTE If installation of one end of the actuator is difficult, complete electrical connections, turn
power on and align holes by operating up or down foot pedals as required. This will
extend or contract the actuator rod, enabling alignment. Make sure power is off before
proceeding.
8. Complete electrical connections as necessary.

9. Remove safety pins from the scissor locking holes and insert into the cross axis
holes of the clevis pins.
10. Replace all eight (8) covers (refer to Chapter 2, Installation).
11. Perform an operational test and check table travel and positions.
6-6
Service Manual
SECTION 2
GENERATOR
2-1 Overview
WARNING the smooth operation of the Silhouette HF Thousand Series generator. To assist the user,
maintenance schedules and procedures and calibration checklists are provided. To guide
the technician, the system's internal diagnostic utility is detailed. This section also
includes a detailed component listing of the Silhouette HF's replaceable parts; refer to
Chapter 7, Renewal Parts.
CAUTION: This equipment contains electrostatic sensitive

devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before
handling components or PCBs.
2-1-1 Maintenance And Service Guidelines
To keep the Silhouette HF operating properly, it must be inspected and calibrated at
regular intervals, depending on the age and use of the equipment. When there is a
problem, call a GE recognized service technician. Do not operate equipment until all
repairs are completed.
Note: If components which have a direct or indirect influence on safety or radiation protection
are replaced, it is essential that only GE specified replacement parts be used.
2-1-2 Maintenance Procedures

Periodic planned maintenance, including cleaning, electrical and mechanical adjustments,
is to be performed every twelve months. This maintenance is required to maintain the
system in good working order and insure operational reliability. It is recommended that
the service technician be prepared with the standard tools and equipment required for the
service call. These are listed in Chapter 3, Calibration.
Use the Maintenance Checklist in Table 6-1 as a guide in performing the required visual,
mechanical and electrical inspection/adjustment procedures.
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same
type and rating of fuse.
WARNING
2-1-2-1 Electrical Maintenance

Use the Calibration Checklist, Table 6-2, and accompanying data sheets and verify that
all calibrations are within specified tolerances as stated in Section 2, General
Information; this is required to demonstrate compliance. The Calibration Checklist
corresponds to the procedure sequence in Chapter 3, Calibration. If necessary, calibrate
according to the procedures in Chapter 3.
6-7
Service Manual
2-1-2-2 Printer Maintenance (for Internal Printer Option)

The printer is supplied with a 1-inch core roll of 2-3/4 x 5/16-inch stick-on labels (TREX
MEDICAL/BENNETT P/N 14000021-5) and a black/red ribbon cartridge. Routine
printer maintenance consists of the following tasks:
Removing/replacing the ribbon cartridge
Removing/replacing the paper rolls
To access the built-in printer to remove/replace the paper or ribbon cartridge, lift the
hinged cover of the Operator Control Panel as shown:
ILLUSTRATION 6-7
ACCESSING THE INTERNAL PRINTER
Front Panel
Interface Cable
6-8
Service Manual
2-1-2-3 Removing/Replacing the Ribbon Cartridge

The black and red ribbon cartridge has a service life of approximately two million
characters. When it is necessary to remove and replace the current ribbon cartridge,
proceed as follows:
Removing the Ribbon Cartridge
1. Grasp the cartridge and lift upward as shown in Illustration 6-8.
Replacing the Ribbon Cartridge
1. Position the cartridge above the hold down tabs; press the cartridge down until it
clicks securely into place.
2. Make sure that the ribbon is placed between the print head and the ribbon guide.
3. Ensure that the ribbon is tight. If it is necessary to tighten the ribbon, turn the thumb
screw in the direction of the arrow. Refer to Illustration 6-8.
ILLUSTRATION 6-8
REMOVING/REPLACING THE RIBBON CARTRIDGE
2-1-2-4 Removing/Replacing the Paper/Label Roll

To change the roll, remove the roll from the feed assembly as follows:
Removing the Paper/Label Roll
1. Remove the roll from the holder by lifting the roll from the slotted bracket as
illustrated on the following page. The roll will lift out together with the metal rod.
2. Cut the paper or tear at the perforation and remove the remaining labels, core and metal
rod. Then press the LINE FEED key until any remaining paper is fed through the
paper path.
Replacing the Paper/Label Roll:
To replace the roll and properly position the labels, proceed accordingly:
1. Place the new roll with the metal rod centered into the slotted bracket.
2. Feed the new roll of paper through the paper path in the direction of the arrows as
shown.
3. Position the leading edge of the paper under the pin wheels. Pull and turn the Paper
Feed Knob, feeding the paper through the paper path until the paper feeds up above
the print head.
4. Ensure that the paper is positioned between the ribbon guide and the metal plate with
the ribbon in the appropriate position.
6-9
Service Manual
5. Continue to turn the Paper Feed Knob until an appropriate length of paper or
approximately six labels have fed through.
6. Pull the paper completely through the paper slot and close the cover.
7. When replacing a roll of printer labels, it is also necessary to align the labels to insure
that the labels print on-line. To align the labels, proceed as follows:
With the cover closed, feed approximately four to six labels through the slot.
Properly position the labels by aligning the cutting edge of the tear bar to the open
space between the labels.
ILLUSTRATION 6-9
REPLACING THE PAPER ROLL
6-10
Service Manual
TABLE 6-1
SILHOUETTE HF SERIES MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
SERIAL NUMBER: ________________________________
TUBE SERIAL NUMBER: ___________________________
Are the Operator Control Panel (OCP) keys functioning properly?
Are the Operator Control Panel (OCP) LED's functioning properly?
Are room door interlocks functioning properly?
Remove cabinet covers: check mounting hardware, support brackets, wiring and connectors.
Repair/replace or secure as necessary.
Are all cabinet covers in place and secure?
Visually inspect all external cables and wiring for wear.
Are all covers and control panels clean; if not, wipe with damp cloth.
Review the calibration Checklist. Have all items been completed?
Perform diagnostic test utility routines. Record any errors:

_________________________________________________________________________________
Inspect recent films for image quality/artifacts. Record quality/artifacts:

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Comments:
_________________________________________________________________________________
Checked by: _________________________________ Date:_________________________________
6-11
Service Manual
TABLE 6-2
SILHOUETTE HF SERIES CALIBRATION CHECKLIST
SILHOUETTE HF NUMBER:
__________________________________________________________________
TUBE SERIAL NUMBER: ___________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE VOLTAGE: ___________________________________________________________________
S.E.S. VOLTAGE/ D.C. REFERENCE LEVEL: ____________________________________________________
SOURCE CHARGER VOLTAGE (SE ONLY): ____________________________________________________
FILAMENT VOLTAGE SUPPLY: ______________________________________________________________
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY +/-15 VDC: _____________________________________________________
KVP CONTROL BOARD ALIGNMENT: _________________________________________________________
KVP CALIBRATION: _______________________________________________________________________
MA CALIBRATION: _________________________________________________________________________
MAXIMUM DEVIATION: KVP, TIME, MA, MAS ___________________________________________________
LINEARITY: ______________________________________________________________________________
REPRODUCIBILITY: ________________________________________________________________________
FOR SYSTEMS WITH THE AEC OPTION:
AEC CALIBRATION: ______________________________________________________________
AEC LINEARITY: ________________________________________________________________
AEC REPRODUCIBILITY: _________________________________________________________
CALIBRATED BY: __________________________________ DATE: __________________________________
6-12
Service Manual
MAXIMUM DEVIATION: KVP, TIME, MA, MAS LIMITS

SILHOUETTE HF SERIAL NUMBER: mA: +/- 10% or 5 mA
TUBE SERIAL NUMBER: kVp : +/- 5%
Time: +/- 1% or 3 Milliseconds
Record mA (TIME = 100 Milliseconds):
25S 75S 200L 300L 400L
50 kVp
70 kVp
90 kVp
110 kVp N/A
Record kVp (TIME = 100 Milliseconds):
25S 75S 200L 300L 400L
50 kVp
70 kVp
90 kVp
110 kVp N/A
TEST UNIT AT FOLLOWING SETTINGS

SETTINGS FOR LINEARITY
kVp mA Time
1 Setting 40 500L 250 msec. Non-AEC AEC
Reading _____ _____ _____ Test 1 Test 2 Test 1 Test 2
KVP 80 80 50 50
2 Setting 60 600L 20 msec.
MA 300L 400L 300L 200L
Reading _____ _____ _____
MAS 30 40
3 Setting 80 150S 50 msec.
Reading _____ _____ _____ SETTINGS FOR REPRODUCIBILITY
Non-AEC AEC
4 Setting 100 75S 3 sec.
Reading _____ _____ _____ KVP 100 55
MA 150S 75S
TIME 20 msec
Reading _____ _____ _____
6-13
Service Manual
MAXIMUM DEVIATION: KVP, TIME, MA, MAS LIMITS

SILHOUETTE HF SERIAL NUMBER: mA: +/- 10% or 5 mA
TUBE SERIAL NUMBER: kVp : +/- 5%
Time: +/- 1% or 3 Milliseconds
Record mA (TIME = 100 Milliseconds):
75S 100L 200L 300L
50 kVp
70 kVp
90 kVp
110 kVp
Record kVp (TIME = 100 Milliseconds):
75S 100L 200L 300L
50 kVp
70 kVp
90 kVp
110 kVp
TEST UNIT AT FOLLOWING SETTINGS SETTINGS FOR LINEARITY

kVp mA Time
Non-AEC AEC
Reading _____ _____ _____ Test 1 Test 2 Test 1 Test 2
KVP 80 80 50 50
MA 300L 400L 300L 200L
Reading _____ _____ _____
MAS 30 40
Reading _____ _____ _____ SETTINGS FOR REPRODUCIBILITY
Non-AEC AEC
4 Setting 100 100L 3 sec.
Reading _____ _____ _____ KVP 100 55
MA 150S 75S
5 Setting 120 250L 100 msec. TIME 20 msec
Reading _____ _____ _____
6-14
Service Manual
Linearity Test Average Exposure Ratio
Silhouette HF Series Serial Number: ____________

Tube Serial Number: ____________
X1 - X2
0.1
X1 + X2
TEST 1 TEST 2
NOMINAL SETTINGS NOMINAL SETTINGS
KVP = 80 KVP = 80
MA = ______ MA = ______
TIME = 100 milliseconds TIME = 100 milliseconds
MAS = ______ MAS = ______
EXP. MR EXP. MR
A1 ____________ B1 ____________
A2 ____________ B2 ____________
A3 ____________ B3 ____________
A4 ____________ B4 ____________
A5 ____________ B5 ____________
A6 ____________ B6 ____________
A7 ____________ B7 ____________
A8 ____________ B8 ____________
A9 ____________ B9 ____________
A10 ____________ B10 ____________
SUM ____________ SUM ____________
AVG. ____________ AVG. ____________
AVG AVG
X1 = = X2 = =
MAS MAS
X1 - X2
=
X1 + X2
TEST 3
REPRODUCIBILITY
Set exposure factors to : 100 kVp, ______ mA and 100 milliseconds.

C.O.V. ______ 0.05
Calibrated By: __________________________________________ Date: __________________________
6-15
Service Manual
AEC Linearity Test Average Exposure Ratio
Serial Number: ____________

Tube Serial Number: ____________
X1 - X2
0.1
X1 + X2
TEST 1 TEST 2
NOMINAL SETTINGS NOMINAL SETTINGS
KVP = 50 KVP = 50
MA = ______ MA = ______
DENSITY = N (normal) DENSITY = N (normal)
WATER (inches) 5 in field WATER (inches) 5 in field
EXP. MR EXP. MR
A1 ____________ B1 ____________
A2 ____________ B2 ____________
A3 ____________ B3 ____________
A4 ____________ B4 ____________
A5 ____________ B5 ____________
A6 ____________ B6 ____________
A7 ____________ B7 ____________
A8 ____________ B8 ____________
A9 ____________ B9 ____________
A10 ____________ B10 ____________
SUM ____________ SUM ____________
AVG. ____________ AVG. ____________
X1=AVG X2=AVG
X1 - X2
=
X1 + X2
TEST 3
AEC REPRODUCIBILITY
Set exposure factors to : 55 kVp, ______ mA, +5 DENSITY with 5 inches of water in the field.
C.O.V. ______ 0.05
Calibrated By: __________________________________________ Date: __________________________
6-16
Service Manual
SECTION 3
COLLIMATOR

3-1-1 Overview
the smooth operation of the D-70A. It includes the following:
Maintenance Requirements and Checklist
Maintenance Procedures by Component
Replacement Parts and Ordering Information
Troubleshooting
3-1-2 Planned Maintenance
To keep the Automatic Collimator unit operating properly, it must be inspected and
checked at regular intervals depending on the age and use of the equipment. When there
is a problem, call an authorized service technician.
3-1-3 Periodic Maintenance
It is necessary to repeat the calibration procedures below and adjust as required to meet
compliance standards:
1. Every six months or 15,000 operational cycles, whichever occurs first.
2. Every time the projection lamp is replaced or other maintenance is performed which
can affect the required accuracies.
3. Every time the collimator is installed or removed and reinstalled on the x-ray tube.
3-1-4 Lubrication
Lubrication of all moving parts must be performed every 24 months using lubriplate No.
2302 G.C. Electronics or equivalent. Clean the plastic window with a soft, dry cloth only.
3-1-5 Service Maintenance
In the event that the D-70A Logic Board (208056) is replaced, it will be necessary to
calibrate the replacement board as follows.
3-1-6 Tray Bias Voltage Adjustment
1. Insert the tray into the bucky with a cassette (any size) locked into place.
4. Adjust R19 (refer to Logic Board Layout) for 3.41 VDC +/- .02V.
6. Adjust R22 for 2.06 VDC +/- .02V.
7. Recheck R19 at TP6.
Note: Adjusting R19 and R22 are interactive operations, and must be repeated until required
3-1-7 Continuous Sensing Tray Calibration

1. Insert the tray into the bucky with a 10" x 12" (24cm x 30cm) cassette locked into
place [10" (24cm) long dimension; 12" (30cm) cross dimension].
3. Connect the positive side of the meter to TP4 (Logic Board Layout).
6-17
Service Manual
Note: Refer to cassette tray manual for cross dimension and long dimension potentiometer
locations.
4. Adjust the tray cross dimension pot for 2.83 VDC +/-.02V.
5. Connect the positive lead to TP3 (Logic Board Layout).
6. Adjust the tray long dimension pot for 2.63 VDC +/-.02V.
Note: Refer to Table 6-3 for film sizes (I.R.size) vs. required I.R. voltages.
TABLE 6-3
IMAGE RECEPTOR VOLTAGES*
I.R. Size (in.) I.R. Voltage I.R. Size (cm) I.R. Voltage
5 2.13 13 (5.12") 2.14

6 2.23 18 (7.08") 2.34
7 2.33 24 (9.45") 2.57
8 2.43 30 (11.81") 2.81
9 2.53 35 (13.78") 3.01
10 2.63 40 (15.75") 3.20
11 2.73 43 (16.93") 3.32
12 2.83
13 2.93
14 3.03
15 3.13
16 3.23
17 3.33
* Calculated values for reference.
Note: I.R: Image Receptor
6-18
Service Manual
TABLE 6-4
MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST (D-70A)
Model #: Serial #:
1. SID Indication (ref. Chapter 2, Installation) __________
2. Light Field to X-Ray Field Alignment (ref. Chapter 3, Calibration) __________
3. X-Ray Field vs. Indicated Size (ref. Chapter 3, Calibration) __________
4. X-Ray Field and Receptor Alignment (ref. Chapter 3, Calibration) __________
5. Beam Alignment (ref. Chapter 3, Calibration) __________
6. Cross Hairs to Light Field Alignment (ref. Chapter 3, Calibration) __________
7. Bucky Light Line Alignment (ref. Chapter 3, Calibration) __________
8. Lubrication (ref. Chapter 6, Maintenance) __________
Field Engineer:______________________________________ Date:_________________________________
6-19
Service Manual

3-2-1 Overview
the smooth operation of the D50M Series of manual collimators. It includes the
following:
Maintenance Requirements and Checklist
Maintenance Procedures by Component
Replacement Parts and Ordering Information
3-2-2 Planned Maintenance
To keep the DIAL-X unit operating properly, it must be inspected and checked at regular
intervals depending on the age and use of the equipment. When there is a problem, call
an authorized service technician.
3-2-3 Periodic Maintenance
It is necessary to repeat the alignment and calibration procedures in Chapter 3,
Calibration and adjust as required to meet compliance standards:
1. Every six months or 15,000 operational cycles, whichever occurs first.
2. Every time the projection lamp is replaced or other maintenance is performed which
can affect the required accuracies.
3. Every time the collimator is installed or removed and reinstalled on the x-ray tube.
3-2-4 Lubrication
Lubrication of all moving parts must be performed every 24 months using lubriplate No.
2302 G.C. Electronics or equivalent. Clean the plastic window with a soft, dry cloth only.
TABLE 6-5
MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST (D-50M)
Model #: Serial #:
1. SID Indication (ref. Section 3, Installation) __________
2. Light Field to X-Ray Field Alignment (ref. Section 4, Calibration) __________
3. X-Ray Field vs. Indicated Size (ref. Section 4, Calibration) __________
4. X-Ray Field and Receptor Alignment (ref. Section 4, Calibration) __________
5. Beam Alignment (ref. Section 4, Calibration) __________
6. Cross Hairs to Light Field Alignment (ref. Section 4, Calibration) __________
7. Bucky Light Line Alignment (not for D-50M-MF) (ref. Section 4, Calibration) __________
8. Lubrication (ref. Section 6, Maintenance) __________
Field Engineer:______________________________________ Date:_________________________________
6-20
Service Manual
SECTION 4
VERTICAL BUCKY
4-1 Cleaning
to any cleaning.
WARNING
basis, the bucky surface should be wiped clean. Painted metal surfaces should be cleaned
clean wet cloth.
Caution: Never use abrasive polish on this equipment.
6-21
Service Manual
SECTION 5
TUBE STAND
To keep the tube stand operating properly, perform maintenance tasks at the intervals
indicated in Table 6-6
TABLE 6-6
MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST FOR TUBE STAND
SERVICE INTERVAL
AFTER FIRST
YEAR, THEN
EVERY TWO
YEARS
MAINTENANCE TASK ONE YEAR THEREAFTER TWO YEARS
Clean rails and wear strips with CDX and check for wear. Apply a light coating
of SAE 30 lubricating oil to wear strips.
X
Check all bearing surfaces for cleanliness.

X
Clean cables using clean rag.
X
Perform operational tests.
X
Check that rail mounting hardware is fastened securely.
X
Check that rails are level both longitudinally and laterally. Level as required.
X
Check that wear strip-to-base track mounting hardware is fastened securely.
X
Check that base track mounting hardware is fastened securely. Check shims.
X
Check all system components for loose hardware or wires and for shorted
electrical terminals.
X
Check all ground connections.

X
Check high tension cable connections at x-ray tube.
X
Check for worn external cable and wires; replace as required. If required,
correct cable routing to prevent wear.
X
Check counterweight cable for signs of wear. Replace as required.

X
Check magnetic locks for proper operation.
X
Check that collar counterbalance cable mounting hardware is fastened
securely.
X
Check that tube support mounting hardware is fastened securely.

X
Check cable draping by running the system throughout its intended motions.
Re-drape if necessary to prevent wear or pulling.
X
Check the 90 spring detent for proper operation. X

Check that the rotational movement of the tube/collimator assembly is smooth.
X
Check bumpers (stops) for proper alignment and condition.
X
6-22
Service Manual
CHAPTER 7 RENEWAL PARTS
Note: Beginning January 1, 1998, product serialization numbers were changed from a system
SECTION 1 using a letter and five numbers (e.g., B34025) to a new system using two numbers (last two digits
TABLE of year), a letter (month code, A=Jan, B=Feb., ...) and a four-number digit.
TABLE 7-1
4-WAY/6-WAY TABLE P/N 2129918: REPLACEABLE PARTS
Part
Number Description FRU
2130383 Bearing, DP Groove 8mm x 22mm 2

2130384 Bearing, Needle-Torr B-116 2
2130388 Spring, Compression .24 OD x .024 WD x .88 1
2130394 Spring, Compression .36 OD x .026 WD x .75 1
2130395 Spring, Compression .36 OD x .026 WD x 9/16 LG 1
2130396 Cam Follower, McGill CFE-5/8-SB 1
2130397 Solenoid 1
2130399 PCB Ass'y 6-way Up/Down Limit Board 1
2130400 Bearing, Flanged 0502 ID x .735 OD x 3/8 LG 2
2130401 Bearing, Plain 1.001 ED x 1.128 OD x 1/2 LG 2
2130402 Bearing, Flanged .752 ED x 1.003 OD x .406 LG 2
2130403 Hinge, Foot Pedal 1
2130405 Foot Pedal 1
2130406 Bumper 3/8 D x 3/16 THK 1
2130407 PCB Ass'y - LO HVL 6-Way TBL Logic 1
2130409 Electromagnet 24 VDC 50 LB HLDNG 1
2130410 Linear Actuator D24-21B5-08 1
2130411 Transformer 6-Way Table, T1 (used on tables with serial 1
number below B-35300)
2230389 Transformer 4 & 6-Way Tables, T1 UL/CE (S/N B-35300
and up)
2130415 Spr, Ext - 3/8 OD x .037 WD x 1" LG - STS 1
2130416 Spr, Ext - 1.750 OD x .207 WD x 14 LG 1
2130417 Switch Pushbutton SPST Bucky 1
2139082 Ion Chamber (3 Field) 1
2139083 Ion Chamber Cable 1
2139084 Grid 12:1 103 Line 1
7-1
Service Manual
TABLE 7-1 Continued

4-WAY/6-WAY TABLE P/N 2129918: REPLACEABLE PARTS
Part Number Description FRU
2142966 Grid 12:1 150 Line (stationary) 1

2143472 4-Way Table Lock Control Board (used on tables with 1
serial number below B-35300)
2180152 4-Way Table Lock Control Board UL/CE (S/N 35300 and 1
up)
2143474 4-Way Pedal Board 1
2143476 Inverter Board 1
2139096 Table Top (Insert Only) 2
2139097 Table Top Assembly (Rails and Insert) 2
2158737 Silhouette Table, Top Side Cover 2
2158739 Silhouette Table, Top Rear Cover 2
2158740 Silhouette Table, Bottom Front Cover 1
2158741 Silhouette Table, Bottom Side Cover 1
2158746 Silhouette Table w/Tomo Option, Top Rear Cover 1
2158747 Silhouette Table w/Tomo Option, Rear Bottom Cover 1
2160632 Front Top Cover for 4 & 6 Way Tables (w/GE label) 1
2179840 Emergency Stop Switch Assembly 1
2191468 Transverse Travel Assembly 2
7-1a
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-0
TABLE COVERS
TOP REAR COVER

2158739
(w/TOMO OPTION - 2158746)
BOTTOM REAR COVER

2158740
(w/TOMO OPTION - 2158747)
FRONT TOP COVER

2160632
BOTTOM FRONT COVER

2158740
TOP SIDE COVER
2158737
BOTTOM SIDE COVER (2X)
COVERS.WMF 2158741
(2X)
7-1b
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-1
TABLE ASSEMBLY
LINEAR
SPRING ACTUATOR
2130416 2130410
FLANGED
BEARING
2130402
LO HVL
6-WAY TABLE
LOGIC PCB
2130407
ILLUSTRATION 7-2
TABLE ASSEMBLY
ELECTROMAGNET
2130409
SOLENOID
2130397
BEARING
2130383
7-2
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-3
TABLE ASSEMBLY
FOOT PEDAL
HINGE 6-WAY UP/DOWN
2130403 LIMIT PCB
2130399
FOOT PEDAL BUMPER

2130405 2130406
ILLUSTRATION 7-4
TABLE ASSEMBLY
SOLENOID
2130397
SPRING
2130388
7-3
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-5
TABLE ASSEMBLY
SPRING
2130394
TRANSVERSE
TRAVEL
ASSEMBLY
219468
CAM
FOLLOWER
2130396
ILLUSTRATION 7-6
TABLE ASSEMBLY
BEARING
2130401
7-4
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-7
TABLE ASSEMBLY
BEARING
2130400
ILLUSTRATION 7-8
TABLE ASSEMBLY
TRANSFORMER T1
(NON-CE/UL)
2130411
(CE/UL) 2230389
7-5
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-9
TABLE ASSEMBLY
SPRING
2130415
ILLUSTRATION 7-10
TABLE ASSEMBLY
BUCKY
PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH
2130417
7-6
Service Manual
SECTION 2
GENERATOR
TABLE 7-2
SILHOUETTE HF THOUSAND SERIES P/N 2132359: REPLACEABLE PARTS
Models: Models: Models:

Single- Models: 40 KW 50 KW
Part Phase Stored Three-Phase Three-Phase
Assembly Number Description (CE) Energy (CE) (CE) (CE) FRU
A1 2132360 Interface Board (208067) 1 1 ---- ---- 1

A1 2132489 Interface Board (208117) ---- ---- 1 1 1
A2 2132361 Regulated Power Supply 1 1 1 1 1
(208084)
A3 2213401 Microprocessor Bd
(208116) w/firmware for
single-phase system
(B3115MA) 1 ---- ---- ---- 1
stored-energy system
(B3115MB) ---- 1 ---- ---- 1
three-phase 40 kW
system (B3115MC) ---- ---- 1 ---- 1
three-phase 50 kW
system (B3115MD) ---- ---- ---- 1 1
2224361 Blank IC (for copying 1 1 1 1 1
Master EEPROM)
A4, A8 2132363 KVP Control Bd (208089) 2 2 2 2 1
A5 2216802 Filament Control ---- 1 ---- ---- 1
Regulator Bd (208090)
A5 2132365 Filament Control 1 ---- 1 1 1
Regulator Bd (208163)
A6 2132364 Filament Resistor Bd 1 1 1 1 1
(208086)
A7 2132366 Distribution Board 1 1 1 1 1
(208085)
A7 (CE) 2152348 Distribution Board (CE 1 1 1 1 1

systems; S/N 34000 and up,
or with new style S/N)
7-7
Service Manual
TABLE 7-2 Continued

Models: Models:
Models: Models: 40 KW 50 KW
Part Single-Phase Stored Three-Phase Three-Phase
Assembly Number Description (CE) Energy (CE) (CE) (CE) FRU
A9 2132367 Power Shut Off Board

(208087) ---- 1 ---- ---- 1

(208101) 1 ---- ---- ---- 1

(208122) ---- ---- 1 1 1
A10 2132435 AEC (Optional) (208094) 1 1 1 1 1
A11, A14 2132436 Source Charger Not Used 2 Not Used Not Used 1
(208088)
A11 2132437 Line Monitor (208099) 1 Not Used 1 1 1
A12 (Assy) 2132439 Control Panel 1 1 1 1 2
A12A1 2213406 Front Panel Bd
w/firmware(208113 ) 1 1 1 1 1
A12A3 2132440 LCD Bd 1 1 1 1 2
A12A4 2132441 Printer 1 1 1 1 1
A12A5 2132442 Instrument Panel 1 1 1 1 2
A12A5 2132443 Instrument Panel w/o
printer 1 1 1 1 2
A15 2132444 Serial Interface Bd 1 1 1 1 1
(208112)
A27 2132445 Transformer-Anode 1 1 1 1 1
A28 2132447 Transformer-Cathode 1 1 1 1 1
A19 2132448 Anode Current Driver 4 3 3 3 1
A19 (CE) 2152349 Anode Current Driver
(CE systems; S/N 34000
and up, or with new style
S//N) 1 1 1 1 1
A21 2132449 Cathode Current Driver 4 3 3 3 1

A21 (CE) 2152349 Cathode Current Driver
(CE systems; S/N 34000
and up, or with new style
S/N) 1 1 1 1 1
7-8
Service Manual
TABLE 7-2 Continued
Model: Model: Stored Model: 40 KW Model: 50 KW

Part Single-Phase Energy Three-Phase Three-Phase
Assembly Number Description (CE) (CE) (CE) (CE) FRU
BR1-BR6 2132460 Anode/Cathode 6 Not Used ---- ---- 1

Bridge Rectifiers
(single phase
systems,
205034-04)
BR1, BR2 2216038 Anode/Cathode ---- Not Used 2 2 1
Bridge Rectifiers
(three phase
systems, 205037)
CB1 Circuit Breaker:
2132461 10 amps ---- 1 ---- ---- 1
2132462 60 amps 1 ---- ---- ---- 1
2132463 30 amps ---- ---- 1 1 1
C1 2132464 Rotor Capacitor 1 1 1 1 1

C2 - C7 2132465 capacitor:
1 mfd 6 6 6 6 1
C8 - C19 2132466 Capacitor: 12 Not Used 8 8 1
2400 uf/450 VDC
C8 - C23* 16*
K1 - K3 2132467 Contactor 3 3 ---- ---- 1
K4 2210164 Contactor ---- ---- 1 1 2

w/resistors (three
phase)
SES1 - 2132468 Stored Energy Not Used 4 Not Used Not Used 1
SES4 ModuleH
SES 2159227 Silhouette HF SE Not Used 60 Not Used Not Used 1
Single BatteryH
2160644 Silhouette HF Input 1 Not Used Not Used Not Used 2
Power Terminal
Block
Inter- 2132474 Interconnect Cable 1 1 1 1 2
connect 50'
Cable 2132476 "XX" - length 75'
Silhouette 2132477 Printer Labels 1 1 1 1 1
HF-PTR 2132478 Printer Ribbon 1 1 1 1 1
(Optional)
* Used on Non-CE systems only (below S/N 34000)
HDispose of batteries (stored energy cells) in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations
7-9
Service Manual
TABLE 7-2 Continued
Model: Model: Stored Model: 40 KW Model: 50 KW

Part Single-Phase Energy Three-Phase Three-Phase
Assembly Number Description (CE) (CE) (CE) (CE) FRU
Fuse:
F3-F5,F9, 2132479 3 amp, 250V (fast) 3 (5) 5 (7) 3 (5) 3 (5) 1
F10, F16*,
F17*
F12,F13 2132480 5 amp, 250V (fast) 2 ---- 2 2 1
----
F1,F2,F6- 2132481 8 amp, 250V (fast) 6 6 6 6 1
F8,F11
F12-F15 2132482 30 amp, 500V (fast) ---- 4 ---- ---- 1

D625 2132485 HV Cables (Pair) 25' 1 1 1 1 1
D630 2132486 HV Cables (Pair) 30' ---- ---- ---- ---- 1
D635 2132487 HV Cables (Pair) 35' ---- ---- ---- ---- 1
D640 2132488 HV Cables (Pair) 40' ---- ---- ---- ---- 1
D660 2139085 HV Cables (Pair) 60' ---- ---- ---- ---- 1
A3A1 2142972 Room Warning Light 1 1 1 1 1
PCB (208207)
HFQ-2T 2160648 Two-Tube Switch ---- ---- ---- 1 2
(option)
2216922 Two-Tube Switch ---- ---- ---- 2 1
Hi-Tension Cables,
10-ft. (Pair)
HFQ-HSS 2197129 Power Driver Board ---- ---- ---- 1 1
(208133)
HFQ-HSS 2213410 Control Board ---- ---- ---- 1 1
w/firmware (208134)
HFQ-HSS 2191114 Resistor, 100W, 50W ---- ---- ---- 1 1
F18, F19 2196815 Fuse, 7 amp, 600V ---- ---- ---- 2 1
F1, F20, 2196814 Fuse, 10 amp, 250V ---- ---- ---- 1 1
F21
2200237 Door Latch, Generator
Cabinet 1 1 1 1 1
* Used on CE mark systems only (S/N 34000 and up)
7-10
Service Manual
SECTION 3
VERTICAL BUCKY
TABLE 7-3
VERTICAL BUCKY P/N 2129917: REPLACEMENT PARTS
Part
2139083 Ion Chamber Cable ( ft) 1

2139087 Bucky Tray Non Sensing 1
2139088 Grid 10:1 103 Line 1
2142964 Grid 10:1 150 Line (stationary) 1
2142282 SID Scale Kit (SAE) 1
2142284 SID Scale Kit (Metric) 1
2130375 Bearings, 77R10 1
2130376 Bearing, 77R4A 1
2130357 Magnet (Large) 24 VDC w/Diodes 1
2130377 Pulley Bearing Ass'y 2
2267899 Counterweight Cable Ass'y (Wall Receptor with 1
Stationary Grid Cabinet)
2267902 Counterweight Cable Ass'y (Wall Receptor with Bucky) 1
2130380 Switch 1
2139086 Bucky Tray Size Sensing 2
2139082 Ion Chamber 1
7-11
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-11
BUCKY, BST, IC3
PULLEY BEARING
ASSEMBLY
2130377
ILLUSTRATION 7-12
BUCKY MAGNET 2130357
BEARING
2130375
COLLAR
(REF) BEARING
2130376
BEARING
2130375
7-12
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-13
BUCKY
COUNTERWEIGHT CABLE
ASSEMBLY
2267899 (for Stationary Grid Cabinet)
2267902 (for Bucky)
ILLUSTRATION 7-14
BUCKY
SWITCH 2130380
7-13
Service Manual
SECTION 4
COLLIMATOR

4-1-0-1 Replacement Parts And Ordering Information
This section includes a list of replaceable parts for the Model D-70A automatic collimator.
7-14
Service Manual
TABLE 7-4
D70-A P/N 2129915 REPLACEABLE PARTS LIST
Part Number FRU
Mask 2129920 2
Pointer 2129921 1
Shutter Knob 2129922 1
Mirror/Filter Switch 2129928 1
Button Switch 2129923 1
Projection Lamp 2129924 1
Projection Lamp Socket 2129925 1
Logic Box Knob and Threaded Rod Assembly 2129929 2
Collimator Bulb Reg./Timer Board 2129926 1
Dial Cord Assembly 2129927 2
Mirror/Filter Assy for D-70A 2129930 2
D-70A Logic Board 2129931 1
Tilt Switch 2129932 1
Shutter Potentiometer 2129933 1
Indicator Light (Manual) 2129934 1
Indicator Light (Ready) 2129936 1
Indicator Light (Exposure Hold) 2129939 1
Key Switch 2129941 2
Key 2129942 1
Multi-Cable Assembly (20 ft.) 2129943 2
Power Cable Assembly (20 ft.) 2129944 2
Junction Box Assembly 2129945 2
Fuse Holder 2129946 2
Shutter Motor 2129947 1
Tape Measure (Inch/Metric) 2211120 1
D-70A Automatic Collimator Complete 2160642 1
Collimator Rotational Swivel Mount 2160643 1
Collimator Rails (pair) 2179567 2
Collimator Mount Thumbscrew 2234194 2
7-15
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-15
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY
MIRROR/FILTER
SWITCH 2129928
TILT SWITCH
2129932
ILLUSTRATION 7-16
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY
COLLIMATOR
BULB
REG./TIMER
PCB 2129926
FRONT VIEW
7-16
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-17
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY DIAL CORD ASSEMBLY
2129929
BOTTOM VIEW
SHUTTER
MOTOR 2129947
ILLUSTRATION 7-18 SHUTTER POTENTIOMETER

COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 2129933
BUTTON
SWITCH
2129923
TOP VIEW
MIRROR FILTER
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
2129930
7-17
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-19
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY LAMP SOCKET
2129925
FUSE
HOLDER
2129946
PROJECTION
LAMP
KEY
SWITCH
2129941
KEY
2129942
ILLUSTRATION 7-20
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY
D-70A LOGIC
PCB 2129931
JUNCTION BOX
(REF)
7-18
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-21
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY INDICATOR (READY)
2129939
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(MANUAL) 2129934 (EXPOSURE)
2129939
POINTER
2129921
SHUTTER KNOB
2129922
ILLUSTRATION 7-22
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY
POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY 2129944
7-19
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-23
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY
JUNCTION BOX
ASSEMBLY 2129945
MULTI-CABLE
ASSEMBLY
2129943
7-20
Service Manual

4-2-1 Replacement Parts and Ordering Information
This section provides ordering and repair information. It also includes a list of replaceable parts for THE Model D-50M
manual collimator.
TABLE 7-5
D50-M P/N 2129914 REPLACEABLE PARTS LIST
Description Part Number FRU
Mask 2129920 2
Pointer 2129921 1
Shutter Knob 2129922 1
Button Switch 2129923 1
Projection Lamp 2129924 1
Projection Lamp Socket 2129925 1
30 Second Timer Board 2129926 1
Dial Cord Assembly 2129927 2
Tape Measure (Inch/Metric) 2211120 1
D-50M Manual Collimator Complete 2160641 1
Collimator Rotational Swivel Mount 2160643 1
Collimator Rails (pair) 2179567 2
ILLUSTRATION 7-24
D-50M
DIAL CORD
ASSEMBLY
2129927
7-21
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-25
D-50M
30 SECOND
TIMER PCB
BUTTON SWITCH 2129926
2129923
ILLUSTRATION 7-26
D-50M
PROJECTION
LAMP SOCKET
2129925 PROJECTION LAMP
2129924
7-22
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-27
D-50M
MASK 2129920
ILLUSTRATION 7-28
D-50M
POINTER
2129921
SHUTTER
KNOB
2129922
7-23
Service Manual
SECTION 5
TUBE STAND
TABLE 7-7
TUBE STAND P/N 2129916: REPLACEABLE PARTS
Part
2130355 Switch DPDT 15A SID 1

2130356 Magnet (Small) 24V 1
2130357 Magnet (Large) 24 VDC w/Diodes 1
2130359 Bearing, 6011ZZ 55MM ID x 90MM 2
2130360 Bearing, 6203ZZ 17MM ID x 40MM 1
2130361 Bearing R6, .375 ID x .875 OD x .21 1
2130363 Bearing KC - 040 x DO 2
2130364 LED, Green SID 1
2130365 Pushbutton Switches -8 1
D2136R * X-Ray Tube BXT-200, 0.6 x 1.5 (Eureka) 1
D2146R X-Ray Tube BXT-202, 0.6 x 1.5 (Toshiba) 1
D2166R X-Ray Tube BXT-14100, 0.6 x 1.2 High Speed 1
D2156R X-Ray Tube BXT-150, 1.0 x 2.0, Low Speed, 16 Deg 1
Target (Eureka Emerald Rad 8)
2164201 Cable Concealment Kit 2
2142286 SID Index Indicator 1
2142282 SID Tape Measure Scale (Inch Scale) 1
2142284 SID Tape Measure Scale (Metric Scale) 1
2171178 Transverse Carriage Assembly 2
2247174 Wear Strip Kit, Base Track 2
2133408 Pulley Bearing Assembly 2
2225285 Label, Angulation, Trunnion 1
2225286 Label, Angulation, Tube 1
2130378 Counterweight Cable Assy 1
7-24
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-30
TUBESTAND
BEARING (4)
2130360
BEARING
2130359
ILLUSTRATION 7-29
TUBESTAND
BEARING
2130361
7-25
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-31
TUBESTAND
SID SWITCH
2130355
ILLUSTRATION 7-32
TUBESTAND
PULLEY ASSEMBLY
2133408
CABLE ASSEMBLY
2130378
7-26
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-33
TUBESTAND
MAGNET (SMALL)
2130356
TRANSVERSE
CARRIAGE
ASSEMBLY (REF)
2171178
ILLUSTRATION 7-34
TUBESTAND
BEARING 2130363
7-27
Service Manual
ILLUSTRATION 7-35
TUBESTAND GREEN SID LED 2130364
ROLL SWITCH
REL. LOCK 2130366
SWITCH
2130368
VERTICAL
SWITCH
2130365
LONG. SWITCH
2130367
7-28
Service Manual
CHAPTER 8 - SCHEMATICS
SYSTEM SCHEMATICS INTERFACE BOARD (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM

(USED ON SINGLE-PHASE AND STORED
AUTO COLLIMATOR MAP ....................................................8-3 ENERGY SYSTEMS) .........................................................8-41
MANUAL COLLIMATOR MAP ...............................................8-5 INTERFACE BOARD (A1) 208067 (USED ON
SINGLE-PHASE AND STORED
ENERGY SYSTEMS) .........................................................8-43
TABLES
INTERFACE BOARD (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 4-WAY ............................8-9 (USED ON THREE-PHASE SYSTEM)...............................8-45
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 6-WAY ..........................8-11 INTERFACE BOARD (A1) 208117
FOUR WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL (USED ON THREE-PHASE SYSTEM)...............................8-47
BOARD (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM ......................................8-13 REGULATED POWER SUPPLY BOARD (A2)
FOUR WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL LAYOUT DIAGRAM ............................................................8-49
BOARD (A1) 208136 ..........................................................8-15 REGULATED POWER SUPPLY (A2) 208084.....................8-51
FOUR WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR BOARD (A3) LAYOUT DIAGRAM ...8-53
BOARD (UL/CE) (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM ......................8-16a
MICROPROCESSOR BOARD (A3) 208116 .......................8-55
FOUR WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL
BOARD (UL/CE) (A1) 208242 ..........................................8-16c KVP CONTROL BOARD (A4, A8) LAYOUT DIAGRAM ......8-57
SIX-WAY LOGIC BOARD (A3) LAYOUT DIAGRAM ...........8-17 KVP CONTROL BOARD (A4, A8) 208089 ..........................8-59
SIX-WAY LOGIC BOARD (A3) 208108 ...............................8-19 FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5)
LAYOUT DIAGRAM (USED ON STORED
UP/DOWN LIMIT BOARD (A2) LAYOUT DIAGRAM...........8-21 ENERGY SYSTEM)............................................................8-61
UP/DOWN LIMIT BOARD (A2) 208125...............................8-23 FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5)
FOUR-WAY PEDAL BOARD (A1) 208126 ..........................8-25 208090 (USED ON STORED ENERGY
SYSTEM) ............................................................................8-63
INVERTER BOARD (A4) 208130 ........................................8-27
FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5)
TOMO TABLE UP BOARD (A5) 208225 ...........................8-28a LAYOUT DIAGRAM (USED ON SINGLE- AND
THREE PHASE SYSTEMS) ...............................................8-65
GENERATOR SCHEMATICS FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5)

208163 (USED ON STORED ENERGY SYSTEMS)..........8-67
HFQ-1000 SINGLE PHASE INPUT
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM FILAMENT RESISTOR BOARD (A6) LAYOUT DIAGRAM .8-69
(BELOW S/N 34000) ..........................................................8-31 FILAMENT RESISTOR BOARD (A6) 208086 .....................8-71
HFQ-1000 SINGLE PHASE INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD (A7) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (NON-CE MARK SYSTEMS)............................................8-72a
(S/N 34000 AND UP) ........................................................8-32a
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (A7) 208085 (NON-CE
HFQ-6000SE INTERCONNECTION MARK SYSTEMS) ............................................................8-72c
DIAGRAM (BELOW S/N 34000).........................................8-33
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (A7) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
HFQ-6000SE INTERCONNECTION (CE MARK SYSTEMS) ...................................................8-72e
DIAGRAM (S/N 34000 AND UP) ......................................8-34a
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (A7) 208085 (CE MARK
THREE PHASE (40 kW) INTERCONNECTION SYSTEMS)........................................................................8-72g
(BELOW S/N 34000) ..........................................................8-35
POWER SHUT-OFF BOARD (A9) 208087 (SE) .................8-73
THREE PHASE (40 kW) INTERCONNECTION
(S/N 34000 AND UP) ........................................................8-36a POWER SHUT-OFF BOARD (A9) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
(NON-SE)............................................................................8-75
THREE PHASE (50 kW) INTERCONNECTION
(BELOW S/N 34000).........................................................8-36c POWER SHUT-OFF BOARD (A9) 208101 (NON-SE) ........8-77
THREE PHASE (50 kW) INTERCONNECTION POWER SHUT-OFF BOARD (A9) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
(S/N 34000 AND UP) ........................................................8-36e (THREE-PHASE) ................................................................8-79
SOURCE CHARGER (A11) FIRST SHELF .........................8-37 POWER SHUT-OFF BOARD (A9) 208122
(THREE-PHASE) .................................................................8-81
SOURCE CHARGER (A14) SECOND SHELF....................8-39
8-0
Service Manual
GENERATOR SCHEMATICS (CONT'D) COLLIMATOR SCHEMATICS

D-70A LOGIC BOARD LAYOUT DIAGRAM ......................8-113
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10) (REV. M)
D-70A LOGIC BOARD, 208056 .........................................8-115
LAYOUT DIAGRAM .............................................................8-83
COLLIMATOR PROJECTION LAMP
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10) (REV. M) 208094 ............8-85
REGULATOR/TIMER BOARD LAYOUT ...........................8-117
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10) (REV. 20 AND UP)
COLLIMATOR PROJECTION LAMP
LAYOUT DIAGRAM ..........................................................8-86a
REGULATOR/TIMER BOARD, 208120 ............................8-119
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10)
(REV. 20 AND UP), 208094 ...............................................8-86c
TUBESTAND SCHEMATICS
SOURCE CHARGER BOARD (A11, A14)
LAYOUT DIAGRAM .............................................................8-87 TUBESTAND .....................................................................8-125
SOURCE CHARGER BOARD (A11, A14) 208088..............8-89
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (A12)
LAYOUT DIAGRAM .............................................................8-91
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (A12) 208113....................8-93
LINE VOLTAGE MONITOR BOARD (A11)
LAYOUT DIAGRAM .............................................................8-95
LINE VOLTAGE MONITOR BOARD (A11) 208099 .............8-97
SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD (A15) LAYOUT DIAGRAM ..8-99
SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD (A15) 208112.....................8-101
AEC SINGLE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD LAYOUT
DIAGRAM .........................................................................8-103
AEC SINGLE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD, 208139 ...........8-105
AEC THREE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD LAYOUT
DIAGRAM .........................................................................8-107
AEC THREE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD, 208139-3.........8-109
ROOM WARNING LIGHT BOARD LAYOUT ...................8-110a
ROOM WARNING LIGHT BOARD, 208207 ....................8-110b
HI-SPEED STARTER/TWO-TUBE OPTION SCHEMATICS

HFQ-HSS INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM..........................8-110e
POWER DRIVER BOARD LAYOUT ................................8-110g
POWER DRIVER BOARD, 208133 ..................................8-110i
CONTROL BOARD LAYOUT ...........................................8-110k
HI-SPEED ROTOR CONTROL BOARD, 208134...........8-110m
TWO-TUBE OPTION RELAY ASSEMBLY ......................8-110u
TWO-TUBE OPTION RELAY ASSEMBLY LAYOUT.......8-110w
TWO-TUBE OPTION DC POWER SUPPLY
BOARD LAYOUT ............................................................8-110y
TWO-TUBE OPTION DC POWER SUPPLY
BOARD, 208103 ...........................................................8-110aa
8-0a
Service Manual
SECTION 1
SYSTEM
8-1 / 8-2 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-1
AUTO COLLIMATOR MAP
D70A
LOGIC
BD.
NOTE:
TB1 IS LOCATED
ON A3 LOGIC BOARD.
DO NOT CONNECT
PBL WIRES TO TB1
ON TABLE BASE.
8-3 / 8-4 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-2
MANUAL COLLIMATOR MAP
8-5 / 8-6 (Blank)

Service Manual
SECTION 2
TABLE
8-7 / 8-8 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-3
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 4-WAY
REV 1
8-9 / 8-10 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-4
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 6-WAY
8-11 / 8-12 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-5
FOUR-WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL BOARD (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (S/N BELOW B-35300)
8-13 / 8-14 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-6
FOUR-WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL BOARD (A1) 208136 (S/N BELOW B-35300)
8-15 / 8-16 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-6A
FOUR-WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL BOARD (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (S/N B-35300 AND UP)
8-16a / 8-16b (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-6B
FOUR-WAY TABLE LOCK CONTROL BOARD (A1) 208242 (S/N B-35300 AND UP)
8-16c / 8-16d (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-7
SIX-WAY LOGIC BOARD (A3) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-17 / 8-18 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-8
SIX-WAY LOGIC BOARD (A3) 208108
8-19 / 8-20 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-9
UP/DOWN LIMIT BOARD (A2) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-21 / 8-22 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-10
UP/DOWN LIMIT BOARD (A2) 208125
8-23 / 8-24 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-11
FOUR-WAY PEDAL BOARD (A1) 208126
8-25 / 8-26 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-12
INVERTER BOARD (A4) 208130
8-27 / 8-28 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-12a
TOMO TABLE UP BOARD (A5) 208225
8-28a / 8-28b (Blank)

Service Manual
SECTION 3
GENERATOR
8-29 / 8-30 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-13
HFQ-1000 SINGLE PHASE INPUT INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (BELOW S/N 34000)
SINGLE PHASE INPUT

INTERCONNECTION REV. C1
8-31 / 8-32 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-13a
HFQ-1000 SINGLE PHASE INPUT INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (S/N 34000 AND UP)
8-32a / 8-32b (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-14
HFQ-6000SE INTERCONNECTION (BELOW S/N 34000)
8-33 / 8-34 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-14a
HFQ-6000SE INTERCONNECTION (S/N 34000 AND UP)
8-34a/ 8-34b (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-15
THREE PHASE (40 kW) INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (S/N BELOW 34000)
8-35/ 8-36 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-15a
THREE PHASE (40 kW) INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (S/N 34000 AND UP)
8-36a / 8-36b (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-15b
THREE PHASE (50 kW) INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (S/N BELOW 34000)
8-36c / 8-36d (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-15c
THREE PHASE (50 kW) INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (S/N 34000 AND UP)
8-36e / 8-36f (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-16
SOURCE CHARGER (A11) FIRST SHELF
8-37/ 8-38 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-17
SOURCE CHARGER (A14) SECOND SHELF
8-39/ 8-40 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-18
INTERFACE BOARD (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (USED ON SINGLE-PHASE AND STORED ENERGY SYSTEMS)
8-41 / 8-42 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-19
INTERFACE BOARD (A1) 208067 (USED ON SINGLE-PHASE AND STORED ENERGY SYSTEMS)
8-43 / 8-44 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-20
INTERFACE BOARD (A1) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (USED ON THREE-PHASE SYSTEM)
8-45 / 8-46 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-21
INTERFACE BOARD (A1) 208117 (USED ON THREE-PHASE SYSTEM)
8-47 / 8-48 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-22
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY BOARD (A2) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-49 / 8-50 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-23
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY (A2) 208084
8-51 / 8-52 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-24
MICROPROCESSOR BOARD (A3) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-53 / 8-54 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-25
MICROPROCESSOR BOARD (A3) 208116
8-55 / 8-56 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-26
KVP CONTROL BOARD (A4, A8) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-57 / 8-58 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-27
KVP CONTROL BOARD (A4, A8) 208089
8-59 / 8-60 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-28
FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (USED ON STORED ENERGY SYSTEM)
8-61 / 8-62 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-29
FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5) 208090 (USED ON STORED ENERGY SYSTEM)
8-63 / 8-64 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-30
FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (USED ON SINGLE- AND THREE-PHASE SYSTEMS)
8-65 / 8-66 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-31
FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR BOARD (A5) 208163 (USED ON SINGLE- AND THREE-PHASE SYSTEMS)
8-67/ 8-68 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-32
FILAMENT RESISTOR BOARD (A6) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-69 / 8-70 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-33
FILAMENT RESISTOR BOARD (A6) 208086
8-71 / 8-72 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-33a
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (A7) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (NON-CE MARK SYSTEMS)
8-72a / 8-72b (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-33b
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (A7) 208085 (NON-CE MARK SYSTEMS)
8-72c / 8-72d (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-33c
DISTRUBUTION BOARD (A7) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (CE MARK SYSTEMS)
8-72e / 8-72f (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-33d
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (A7) 208085 (CE MARK SYSTEMS)
8-72g / 8-72h (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-34
POWER SHUT OFF BOARD (A9) 208087 (SE)
8-73 / 8-74 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-35
POWER SHUT OFF BOARD (A9) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (NON-SE)
8-75 / 8-76 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-36
POWER SHUT OFF BOAR (A9) 208101 (NON-SE)
8-77 / 8-78 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-37
POWER SHUT OFF BOARD (A9) LAYOUT DIAGRAM (THREE-PHASE)
8-79 / 8-80 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-38
POWER SHUT OFF BOARD (A9) 208122 (THREE-PHASE)
8-81 / 8-82 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-39
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10) (REV.M) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-83 / 8-84 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-40
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10) (REV. M), 208094
8-85 / 8-86 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-40a
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10) (REV. 20 AND UP) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-86a / 8-86b (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-40b
AEC INTERFACE BOARD (A10) (REV. 20 AND UP), 208094
8-86c / 8-86d (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-43
SOURCE CHARGER BOARD (A11, A14) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-87 / 8-88 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-44
SOURCE CHARGER BOARD (A11,A14) 208088
8-89 / 8-90 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-45
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (A12)LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-91 / 8-92 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-46
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (A12) 208113
8-93 / 8-94 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-45
LINE VOLTAGE MONITOR BOARD (A11) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-95 / 8-96 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-46
LINE VOLTAGE MONITOR BOARD (A11) 208099
8-97 / 8-98 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-47
SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD (A15) LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-99 / 8-100 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-48
SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD (A15) 208112
8-101 / 8-102 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-49
AEC SINGLE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-103 / 8-104 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-50
AEC SINGLE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD, 208139
8-105 / 8-106 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-51
AEC THREE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-107 / 8-108 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52
AEC THREE-FIELD CHAMBER BOARD, 208139-3
8-109 / 8-110 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52a
ROOM WARNING LIGHT BOARD LAYOUT
8-110a / 8-110b (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52b
ROOM WARNING LIGHT BOARD, 208207
8-110c / 8-110d (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52c
HFQ-HSS INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
SEE NOTE 1
NOTES:
1. FOR OPERATION WITH TOSHIBA TUBE, CONNECT J1 TO P2 AND J2 TO P1 AS SHOWN BELOW.
2. FOR OPERATION WITH VARIAN TUBE ONLY - DO NOT CONNECT IF USING TOSHIBA TUBE.
3. VARIAN TUBE IS IDENTIFIED BY A CIRCULAR LABEL LOCATED ON TUBE END CAP.
TOSHIBA TUBE IS IDENTIFIED BY A RECTANGULAR LABEL LOCATED ON TUBE HOUSING.
SEE NOTE 2
8-110e / 8-110f (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52d
POWER DRIVER BOARD LAYOUT
K2 COIL
K1 COIL MN COM
90/300 300 26 R2 90 26 VAC GND 24V CB+ MB+ MN1 PH1
VAC VAC VAC VAC RET. V1 V2 V3
TB1 TB2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
V4 V6
V5
3A/250V F1
D1
D3
G
Q1
D
S
S
K2
D
G
Q2
D2
D4
PCB ASS'Y 208133 REV

R4
U6
R6
R2
K1 R7 R16
R8 D6 C5 U4
D5 R11
+ R1
DB1
- D9
Z1 R3 Z2 R12
D12
C1
+
G
S
D
D
+
Q3
S
Q4 U5 U8
G
D10
+24V
D11 R5
C2 C7 C8
U1
C6 R13
GND
U9
D7
R14
R10
R9
R15 D8 U7
+15V T2
C3 T1
U2 U3 R17 R19
+5V R20
C4
D14 TB3
J1
D13
R18
TERM#
MAIN PHASE
REV. H
8-110g / 8-110h (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52e
POWER DRIVER BOARD , 208133
REV. H
8-110i / 8-110j (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52f
CONTROL BOARD LAYOUT
8-110k / 8-110l (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52g
HI-SPEED ROTOR CONTROL BOARD, 208134 (SHEET 1 OF 4)
8-110m / 8-110n (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52h
HIGH SPEED ROTOR CONTROL BOARD, 208134 (SHEET 2 OF 4)
8-110o / 8-110p (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52i
HI-SPEED ROTOR CONTROL BOARD , 208134 (SHEET 3 OF 4)
8-110q / 8-110r (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52j
HI-SPEED ROTOR CONTROL BOARD, 208134 (SHEET 4 OF 4)
8-110s / 8-110t (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52k
TWO-TUBE OPTION RELAY ASSEMBLY
P/O TWO-TUBE SWITCH
#1 CATHODE
H.V. CABLE H.V. CABLE
CATHODE
TRANSFORMER #2 CATHODE
H.V. CABLE
#1 ANODE
H.V. CABLE H.V. CABLE
ANODE
TRANSFORMER #2 ANODE
H.V. CABLE
8-110u / 8-110v (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52l
TWO TUBE OPTION RELAY ASSEMBLY LAYOUT
8-110w / 8-110x (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52m
TWO TUBE OPTION DC POWER SUPPLY BOARD LAYOUT
8-110y / 8-110z (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-52n
TWO TUBE OPTION DC POWER SUPPLY BOARD, 208103
8-110aa / 8-110ab (Blank)

Service Manual
SECTION 4
COLLIMATOR
4-1 D-70A
4-2 D-50M
8-111 / 8-112 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-53
D-70A LOGIC BOARD LAYOUT DIAGRAM
8-113 / 8-114 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-54
D-70A LOGIC BOARD, 208056
8-115 / 8-116 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-55
COLLIMATOR PROJECTION LAMP REGULATOR/TIMER BOARD LAYOUT
8-117 / 8-118 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-56
COLLIMATOR PROJECTION LAMP REGULATOR/TIMER BOARD, 208120
8-119 / 8-120 (Blank)

Service Manual
SECTION 5
VERTICAL BUCKY
8-121 / 8-122 (Blank)

Service Manual
SECTION 6
TUBESTAND
8-123 / 8-124 (Blank)

Service Manual
SCHEMATIC 8-57
TUBESTAND
8-125 / 8-126 (Blank)

GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P. O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical SystemsEurope: Telex 698626
283, rue de la Miniere, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex
France

Silhouette HF Service PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Silhouette HF Service PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Medical Systems

Copyright 2000 By General Electric Company

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

IF A CUSTOMER'S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N'EST DISPONIBLE QU'EN

SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS

DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA

SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA,

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBLE

SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS

European registered place of business:

CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2 TABLE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

SECTION 3 GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

SECTION 4 TUBE STAND SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

SECTION 5 COLLIMATOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

SECTION 6 VERTICAL WALL STAND SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

SECTION 7 X-RAY TUBE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

SECTION 3 COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

SECTION 4 Vertical Bucky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

CHAPTER 3 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

SECTION 3 COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

SECTION 4 VERTICAL BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

SECTION 5 TUBE STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

SECTION 3 COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

SECTION 4 VERTICAL BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

SECTION 5 TUBE STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

CHAPTER 5 SERVICE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

SECTION 3 COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

SECTION 4 VERTICAL BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

SECTION 5 TUBE STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

SECTION 3 COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

SECTION 4 VERTICAL BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

SECTION 5 TUBE STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

CHAPTER 7 RENEWAL PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SECTION 2 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

SECTION 3 VERTICAL BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

SECTION 4 COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

SECTION 5 TUBE STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

CHAPTER 8 SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-0

REV DATE TYPE OF MODIFICATION

0 March 17, 1995 Initial Release.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

I-iii 1 1-5 thru 1-8 4 2-11 thru 2-12 8

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Contd)

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

2-19 1 5-1 thru 5-3 4 7-16 thru 7-17 1

See Illustration 1-1.

1 Longitudinal Focal Spot Travel

See Table 1-1 for Table Specifications.

Length 2032 mm (80 in.) 2032 mm (80 in.)